1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */ 2 /* 3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface 4 * 5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc. 6 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz> 7 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> 8 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH 9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH 10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2022 Intel Corporation 11 */ 12 13 #ifndef MAC80211_H 14 #define MAC80211_H 15 16 #include <linux/bug.h> 17 #include <linux/kernel.h> 18 #include <linux/if_ether.h> 19 #include <linux/skbuff.h> 20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h> 21 #include <linux/lockdep.h> 22 #include <net/cfg80211.h> 23 #include <net/codel.h> 24 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h> 25 #include <asm/unaligned.h> 26 27 /** 28 * DOC: Introduction 29 * 30 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements 31 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document 32 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware 33 * drivers. 34 */ 35 36 /** 37 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts 38 * 39 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be 40 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any 41 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such 42 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the 43 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even 44 * tasklet function. 45 * 46 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also 47 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions! 48 */ 49 50 /** 51 * DOC: Warning 52 * 53 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will 54 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet. 55 */ 56 57 /** 58 * DOC: Frame format 59 * 60 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver, 61 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are 62 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the 63 * hardware. 64 * 65 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features: 66 * 67 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload 68 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware. 69 * 70 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to 71 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU. 72 */ 73 74 /** 75 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue 76 * 77 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use. 78 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by 79 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the 80 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback. 81 * 82 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during 83 * suspend. 84 * 85 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock. 86 * 87 */ 88 89 /** 90 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing 91 * 92 * mac80211 uses an intermediate queueing implementation, designed to allow the 93 * driver to keep hardware queues short and to provide some fairness between 94 * different stations/interfaces. 95 * 96 * Drivers must provide the .wake_tx_queue driver operation by either 97 * linking it to ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue() or implementing a custom 98 * handler. 99 * 100 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with 101 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and 102 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames. 103 * 104 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations 105 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops. 106 * 107 * The driver can't access the internal TX queues (iTXQs) directly. 108 * Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue 109 * driver op. 110 * Drivers implementing a custom .wake_tx_queue op can get them by calling 111 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Drivers using ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue() will 112 * simply get the individual frames pushed via the .tx driver operation. 113 * 114 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to 115 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to 116 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls 117 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using 118 * ieee80211_return_txq(). 119 * 120 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has 121 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling 122 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq 123 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls 124 * .release_buffered_frames(). 125 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own 126 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained 127 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue). 128 */ 129 130 /** 131 * DOC: HW timestamping 132 * 133 * Timing Measurement and Fine Timing Measurement require accurate timestamps 134 * of the action frames TX/RX and their respective acks. 135 * 136 * To report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine Timing 137 * Measurement frame RX, the low level driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp 138 * field to the frame RX timestamp and report the ack TX timestamp in the 139 * ieee80211_rx_status struct. 140 * 141 * Similarly, To report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine 142 * Timing Measurement frame TX, the driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp field 143 * to the frame TX timestamp and report the ack RX timestamp in the 144 * ieee80211_tx_status struct. 145 */ 146 struct device; 147 148 /** 149 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues 150 * 151 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues. 152 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set 153 */ 154 enum ieee80211_max_queues { 155 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16, 156 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1, 157 }; 158 159 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff 160 161 /** 162 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211 163 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice 164 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video 165 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort 166 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background 167 */ 168 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers { 169 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0, 170 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1, 171 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2, 172 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3, 173 }; 174 175 /** 176 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration 177 * 178 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS 179 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29. 180 * 181 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255] 182 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form 183 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767] 184 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min] 185 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled 186 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category 187 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue 188 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured 189 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE 190 */ 191 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params { 192 u16 txop; 193 u16 cw_min; 194 u16 cw_max; 195 u8 aifs; 196 bool acm; 197 bool uapsd; 198 bool mu_edca; 199 struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec; 200 }; 201 202 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats { 203 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount; 204 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount; 205 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount; 206 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount; 207 }; 208 209 /** 210 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context 211 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed 212 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed 213 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed 214 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel, 215 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA 216 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed 217 */ 218 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change { 219 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0), 220 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1), 221 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2), 222 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3), 223 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4), 224 }; 225 226 /** 227 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to 228 * 229 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx 230 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only. 231 * 232 * @def: the channel definition 233 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required. 234 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be 235 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions 236 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled 237 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions; 238 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static. 239 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel. 240 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 241 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information. 242 */ 243 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf { 244 struct cfg80211_chan_def def; 245 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def; 246 247 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic; 248 249 bool radar_enabled; 250 251 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 252 }; 253 254 /** 255 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode 256 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already 257 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface 258 * needs to be switched from one to the other. 259 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop 260 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but 261 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches 262 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course 263 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing 264 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context 265 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used 266 * for changes/removal.) 267 */ 268 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode { 269 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF, 270 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS, 271 }; 272 273 /** 274 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information 275 * 276 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that 277 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The 278 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be 279 * done. 280 * 281 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx 282 * @link_conf: the link conf that's switching 283 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned 284 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned 285 */ 286 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch { 287 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 288 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf; 289 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx; 290 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx; 291 }; 292 293 /** 294 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags 295 * 296 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed(), link_info_changed() 297 * and vif_cfg_changed() callbacks to indicate which parameter(s) changed. 298 * 299 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated), 300 * also implies a change in the AID. 301 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed 302 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed 303 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed 304 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed 305 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed 306 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed 307 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever 308 * reason (IBSS and managed mode) 309 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve 310 * new beacon (beaconing modes) 311 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be 312 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes) 313 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed 314 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed 315 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed. 316 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note 317 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode. 318 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface. 319 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode) 320 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode) 321 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode) 322 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface 323 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS) 324 * changed 325 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available: 326 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration. 327 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed, 328 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel 329 * context had been assigned. 330 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed 331 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed 332 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected 333 * keep alive) changed. 334 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface 335 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder 336 * functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode). 337 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed 338 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed. 339 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed 340 * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed. 341 * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response 342 * status changed. 343 * 344 */ 345 enum ieee80211_bss_change { 346 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0, 347 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1, 348 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2, 349 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3, 350 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4, 351 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5, 352 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6, 353 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7, 354 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8, 355 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9, 356 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10, 357 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11, 358 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12, 359 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13, 360 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14, 361 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15, 362 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16, 363 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17, 364 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18, 365 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19, 366 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20, 367 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21, 368 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22, 369 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23, 370 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24, 371 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25, 372 BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER = 1<<26, 373 BSS_CHANGED_TWT = 1<<27, 374 BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD = 1<<28, 375 BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR = 1<<29, 376 BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY = 1<<30, 377 BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = 1<<31, 378 379 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */ 380 }; 381 382 /* 383 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number 384 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP 385 * filtering will be disabled. 386 */ 387 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4 388 389 /** 390 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver 391 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver. 392 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME 393 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received 394 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because 395 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only 396 * once each time the timeout triggers. 397 */ 398 enum ieee80211_event_type { 399 RSSI_EVENT, 400 MLME_EVENT, 401 BAR_RX_EVENT, 402 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT, 403 }; 404 405 /** 406 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT 407 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver. 408 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver. 409 */ 410 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data { 411 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH, 412 RSSI_EVENT_LOW, 413 }; 414 415 /** 416 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT 417 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data 418 */ 419 struct ieee80211_rssi_event { 420 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data; 421 }; 422 423 /** 424 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 425 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication 426 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association 427 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received.. 428 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent. 429 */ 430 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data { 431 AUTH_EVENT, 432 ASSOC_EVENT, 433 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT, 434 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT, 435 }; 436 437 /** 438 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 439 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully. 440 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer. 441 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out. 442 */ 443 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status { 444 MLME_SUCCESS, 445 MLME_DENIED, 446 MLME_TIMEOUT, 447 }; 448 449 /** 450 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT 451 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data 452 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status 453 * @reason: the reason code if applicable 454 */ 455 struct ieee80211_mlme_event { 456 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data; 457 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status; 458 u16 reason; 459 }; 460 461 /** 462 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events 463 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates 464 * @tid: the tid 465 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT) 466 */ 467 struct ieee80211_ba_event { 468 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 469 u16 tid; 470 u16 ssn; 471 }; 472 473 /** 474 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver 475 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type. 476 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT 477 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT 478 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT 479 * @u:union holding the fields above 480 */ 481 struct ieee80211_event { 482 enum ieee80211_event_type type; 483 union { 484 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi; 485 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme; 486 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba; 487 } u; 488 }; 489 490 /** 491 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data 492 * 493 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO 494 * 495 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 496 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 497 */ 498 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data { 499 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN]; 500 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN]; 501 }; 502 503 /** 504 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters 505 * 506 * @lci: LCI subelement content 507 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content 508 * @lci_len: LCI data length 509 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length 510 */ 511 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params { 512 const u8 *lci; 513 const u8 *civicloc; 514 size_t lci_len; 515 size_t civicloc_len; 516 }; 517 518 /** 519 * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from 520 * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail. 521 * 522 * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000) 523 * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000) 524 */ 525 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery { 526 u32 min_interval; 527 u32 max_interval; 528 }; 529 530 /** 531 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters 532 * 533 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association 534 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS. 535 * 536 * @addr: (link) address used locally 537 * @link_id: link ID, or 0 for non-MLO 538 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE 539 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP 540 * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either 541 * ACK, BACK or both 542 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field 543 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us 544 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE 545 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 546 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 547 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 548 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 549 * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames 550 * @twt_broadcast: does this BSS support broadcast TWT 551 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection 552 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble 553 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP) 554 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing, 555 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified 556 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then. 557 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old 558 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the 559 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can 560 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after 561 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the 562 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 563 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf, 564 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation 565 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 566 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY 567 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts. 568 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync 569 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently 570 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks. 571 * Note also that this is not used with MLD associations, mac80211 doesn't 572 * know how to track beacons for all of the links for this. 573 * @beacon_int: beacon interval 574 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp 575 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an 576 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in 577 * the current band. 578 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate 579 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled) 580 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS 581 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not 582 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be 583 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example. 584 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data 585 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation. 586 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel. 587 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must 588 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT. 589 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value 590 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should 591 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in 592 * relation to the newly configured threshold. 593 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value 594 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single 595 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it. 596 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold. 597 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis 598 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS. 599 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode. 600 * @txpower: TX power in dBm. INT_MIN means not configured. 601 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit 602 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular 603 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is 604 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from 605 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to 606 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace) 607 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave 608 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed 609 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS 610 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support. 611 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from 612 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated. 613 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include 614 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element. 615 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN 616 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the 617 * station. 618 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM 619 * responder functionality. 620 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder. 621 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile 622 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP 623 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set 624 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set 625 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of 626 * nontransmitted BSSIDs 627 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received 628 * in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set. 629 * @he_oper: HE operation information of the BSS (AP/Mesh) or of the AP we are 630 * connected to (STA) 631 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters. 632 * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE 633 * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration 634 * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response 635 * interval. 636 * @beacon_tx_rate: The configured beacon transmit rate that needs to be passed 637 * to driver when rate control is offloaded to firmware. 638 * @power_type: power type of BSS for 6 GHz 639 * @tx_pwr_env: transmit power envelope array of BSS. 640 * @tx_pwr_env_num: number of @tx_pwr_env. 641 * @pwr_reduction: power constraint of BSS. 642 * @eht_support: does this BSS support EHT 643 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is 644 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine 645 * for read access. 646 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability 647 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL 648 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX 649 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always 650 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be 651 * processed after it switches back to %NULL. 652 * @color_change_active: marks whether a color change is ongoing. Internally it is 653 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine 654 * for read access. 655 * @color_change_color: the bss color that will be used after the change. 656 */ 657 struct ieee80211_bss_conf { 658 const u8 *bssid; 659 unsigned int link_id; 660 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 661 u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext; 662 bool uora_exists; 663 u8 uora_ocw_range; 664 u16 frame_time_rts_th; 665 bool he_support; 666 bool twt_requester; 667 bool twt_responder; 668 bool twt_protected; 669 bool twt_broadcast; 670 /* erp related data */ 671 bool use_cts_prot; 672 bool use_short_preamble; 673 bool use_short_slot; 674 bool enable_beacon; 675 u8 dtim_period; 676 u16 beacon_int; 677 u16 assoc_capability; 678 u64 sync_tsf; 679 u32 sync_device_ts; 680 u8 sync_dtim_count; 681 u32 basic_rates; 682 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate; 683 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 684 u16 ht_operation_mode; 685 s32 cqm_rssi_thold; 686 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst; 687 s32 cqm_rssi_low; 688 s32 cqm_rssi_high; 689 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 690 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group; 691 bool qos; 692 bool hidden_ssid; 693 int txpower; 694 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type; 695 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr; 696 bool allow_p2p_go_ps; 697 u16 max_idle_period; 698 bool protected_keep_alive; 699 bool ftm_responder; 700 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params; 701 /* Multiple BSSID data */ 702 bool nontransmitted; 703 u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN]; 704 u8 bssid_index; 705 u8 bssid_indicator; 706 bool ema_ap; 707 u8 profile_periodicity; 708 struct { 709 u32 params; 710 u16 nss_set; 711 } he_oper; 712 struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd; 713 struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color; 714 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery; 715 u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval; 716 struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask beacon_tx_rate; 717 enum ieee80211_ap_reg_power power_type; 718 struct ieee80211_tx_pwr_env tx_pwr_env[IEEE80211_TPE_MAX_IE_COUNT]; 719 u8 tx_pwr_env_num; 720 u8 pwr_reduction; 721 bool eht_support; 722 723 bool csa_active; 724 bool mu_mimo_owner; 725 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf; 726 727 bool color_change_active; 728 u8 color_change_color; 729 }; 730 731 /** 732 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status 733 * 734 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info. 735 * 736 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame. 737 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence 738 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment 739 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the 740 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly 741 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly 742 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from 743 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing. 744 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to 745 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE 746 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for 747 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field. 748 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack 749 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination 750 * station 751 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame 752 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon 753 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU 754 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211. 755 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted 756 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to 757 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or 758 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station 759 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on 760 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for 761 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above), 762 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the 763 * hardware queue. 764 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged 765 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status 766 * is for the whole aggregation. 767 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned, 768 * so consider using block ack request (BAR). 769 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be 770 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will 771 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment) 772 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate 773 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for 774 * off-channel operation. 775 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation 776 * (header conversion) 777 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211, 778 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS 779 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211, 780 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted 781 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll 782 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must 783 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode. 784 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the 785 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used 786 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the 787 * queue gets full. 788 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted 789 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not 790 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.) 791 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME 792 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status 793 * should kick the MLME state machine. 794 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211 795 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX 796 * status to user space) 797 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame 798 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this 799 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use. 800 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on 801 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done 802 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be 803 * handled properly by the device. 804 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP 805 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow 806 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested. 807 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate. 808 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P 809 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band. 810 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period, 811 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in 812 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames 813 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for 814 * PS-Poll responses. 815 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate. 816 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when 817 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose. 818 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it 819 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for 820 * monitor injection). 821 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with 822 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without 823 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW). 824 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack 825 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK. 826 * 827 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't 828 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary. 829 */ 830 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags { 831 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0), 832 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1), 833 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2), 834 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3), 835 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4), 836 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5), 837 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6), 838 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7), 839 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8), 840 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9), 841 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10), 842 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11), 843 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12), 844 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13), 845 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP = BIT(14), 846 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15), 847 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16), 848 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17), 849 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18), 850 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19), 851 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20), 852 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21), 853 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22), 854 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24), 855 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25), 856 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26), 857 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27), 858 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28), 859 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29), 860 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30), 861 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31), 862 }; 863 864 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23 865 866 #define IEEE80211_TX_RC_S1G_MCS IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS 867 868 /** 869 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control 870 * 871 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control 872 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP) 873 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll 874 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD). 875 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information 876 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame 877 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path 878 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup 879 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211, 880 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before 881 * it can be sent out. 882 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that 883 * has already been assigned to this frame. 884 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER: This frame should not be reordered 885 * relative to other frames that have this flag set, independent 886 * of their QoS TID or other priority field values. 887 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX: first MLO TX, used mostly internally 888 * for sequence number assignment 889 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK: If not @IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, this 890 * frame should be transmitted on the specific link. This really is 891 * only relevant for frames that do not have data present, and is 892 * also not used for 802.3 format frames. Note that even if the frame 893 * is on a specific link, address translation might still apply if 894 * it's intended for an MLD. 895 * 896 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags. 897 */ 898 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags { 899 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0), 900 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1), 901 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2), 902 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3), 903 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4), 904 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP = BIT(5), 905 IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(6), 906 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO = BIT(7), 907 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER = BIT(8), 908 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX = BIT(9), 909 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK = 0xf0000000, 910 }; 911 912 #define IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED 0xf 913 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK_UNSPEC \ 914 u32_encode_bits(IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, \ 915 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK) 916 917 /** 918 * enum mac80211_tx_status_flags - flags to describe transmit status 919 * 920 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID: ACK signal is valid 921 * 922 * These flags are used in tx_info->status.flags. 923 */ 924 enum mac80211_tx_status_flags { 925 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID = BIT(0), 926 }; 927 928 /* 929 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are 930 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack. 931 */ 932 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \ 933 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \ 934 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \ 935 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \ 936 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \ 937 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \ 938 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \ 939 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 940 941 /** 942 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the 943 * Rate Control algorithm. 944 * 945 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx, 946 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate. 947 * 948 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate. 949 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required. 950 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection. 951 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble. 952 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate. 953 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split 954 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number) 955 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in 956 * Greenfield mode. 957 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz. 958 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission 959 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission 960 * (80+80 isn't supported yet) 961 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the 962 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is 963 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS. 964 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate. 965 */ 966 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags { 967 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0), 968 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1), 969 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2), 970 971 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */ 972 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3), 973 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4), 974 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5), 975 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6), 976 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7), 977 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8), 978 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9), 979 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10), 980 }; 981 982 983 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */ 984 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40 985 986 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */ 987 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24 988 989 /* maximum number of rate stages */ 990 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4 991 992 /* maximum number of rate table entries */ 993 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4 994 995 /** 996 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status 997 * 998 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with 999 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags) 1000 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate 1001 * 1002 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used 1003 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried. 1004 * 1005 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should 1006 * always report the rate along with the flags it used. 1007 * 1008 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs 1009 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate 1010 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example, 1011 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the 1012 * information:: 1013 * 1014 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 } 1015 * 1016 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted 1017 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four 1018 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets 1019 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status 1020 * information should then contain:: 1021 * 1022 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ... 1023 * 1024 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2 1025 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement. 1026 */ 1027 struct ieee80211_tx_rate { 1028 s8 idx; 1029 u16 count:5, 1030 flags:11; 1031 } __packed; 1032 1033 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31 1034 1035 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate, 1036 u8 mcs, u8 nss) 1037 { 1038 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF); 1039 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7); 1040 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs; 1041 } 1042 1043 static inline u8 1044 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 1045 { 1046 return rate->idx & 0xF; 1047 } 1048 1049 static inline u8 1050 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 1051 { 1052 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1; 1053 } 1054 1055 /** 1056 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information 1057 * 1058 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses: 1059 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do 1060 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable) 1061 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened 1062 * 1063 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above 1064 * @band: the band to transmit on (use e.g. for checking for races), 1065 * not valid if the interface is an MLD since we won't know which 1066 * link the frame will be transmitted on 1067 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC 1068 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally 1069 * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally 1070 * @control: union part for control data 1071 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try 1072 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS 1073 * @control.use_rts: use RTS 1074 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS 1075 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only) 1076 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table 1077 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients 1078 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL) 1079 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL) 1080 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags 1081 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs) 1082 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space 1083 * @pad: padding 1084 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates 1085 * @status: union part for status data 1086 * @status.rates: attempted rates 1087 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal 1088 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length 1089 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length 1090 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy) 1091 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only 1092 * used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness 1093 * @status.flags: status flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_status_flags 1094 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area 1095 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data 1096 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK 1097 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers 1098 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames. 1099 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set. 1100 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames. 1101 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set. 1102 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame 1103 */ 1104 struct ieee80211_tx_info { 1105 /* common information */ 1106 u32 flags; 1107 u32 band:3, 1108 ack_frame_id:13, 1109 hw_queue:4, 1110 tx_time_est:10; 1111 /* 2 free bits */ 1112 1113 union { 1114 struct { 1115 union { 1116 /* rate control */ 1117 struct { 1118 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[ 1119 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1120 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx; 1121 u8 use_rts:1; 1122 u8 use_cts_prot:1; 1123 u8 short_preamble:1; 1124 u8 skip_table:1; 1125 /* 2 bytes free */ 1126 }; 1127 /* only needed before rate control */ 1128 unsigned long jiffies; 1129 }; 1130 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */ 1131 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 1132 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key; 1133 u32 flags; 1134 codel_time_t enqueue_time; 1135 } control; 1136 struct { 1137 u64 cookie; 1138 } ack; 1139 struct { 1140 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1141 s32 ack_signal; 1142 u8 ampdu_ack_len; 1143 u8 ampdu_len; 1144 u8 antenna; 1145 u16 tx_time; 1146 u8 flags; 1147 void *status_driver_data[18 / sizeof(void *)]; 1148 } status; 1149 struct { 1150 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[ 1151 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1152 u8 pad[4]; 1153 1154 void *rate_driver_data[ 1155 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1156 }; 1157 void *driver_data[ 1158 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1159 }; 1160 }; 1161 1162 static inline u16 1163 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est) 1164 { 1165 /* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime 1166 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1 1167 */ 1168 info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2; 1169 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1170 } 1171 1172 static inline u16 1173 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1174 { 1175 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1176 } 1177 1178 /*** 1179 * struct ieee80211_rate_status - mrr stage for status path 1180 * 1181 * This struct is used in struct ieee80211_tx_status to provide drivers a 1182 * dynamic way to report about used rates and power levels per packet. 1183 * 1184 * @rate_idx The actual used rate. 1185 * @try_count How often the rate was tried. 1186 * @tx_power_idx An idx into the ieee80211_hw->tx_power_levels list of the 1187 * corresponding wifi hardware. The idx shall point to the power level 1188 * that was used when sending the packet. 1189 */ 1190 struct ieee80211_rate_status { 1191 struct rate_info rate_idx; 1192 u8 try_count; 1193 u8 tx_power_idx; 1194 }; 1195 1196 /** 1197 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control 1198 * 1199 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for 1200 * @info: Basic tx status information 1201 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver) 1202 * @rates: Mrr stages that were used when sending the packet 1203 * @n_rates: Number of mrr stages (count of instances for @rates) 1204 * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver 1205 * @ack_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp of the received ack in nanoseconds 1206 * Only needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action 1207 * frames. Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled. 1208 */ 1209 struct ieee80211_tx_status { 1210 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 1211 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info; 1212 struct sk_buff *skb; 1213 struct ieee80211_rate_status *rates; 1214 ktime_t ack_hwtstamp; 1215 u8 n_rates; 1216 1217 struct list_head *free_list; 1218 }; 1219 1220 /** 1221 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs 1222 * 1223 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan 1224 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace 1225 * and the ones generated by mac80211. 1226 * 1227 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs. 1228 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs. 1229 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones) 1230 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies 1231 */ 1232 struct ieee80211_scan_ies { 1233 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1234 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1235 const u8 *common_ies; 1236 size_t common_ie_len; 1237 }; 1238 1239 1240 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1241 { 1242 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb; 1243 } 1244 1245 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1246 { 1247 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb; 1248 } 1249 1250 /** 1251 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status 1252 * 1253 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared. 1254 * 1255 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report 1256 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything 1257 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear 1258 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway). 1259 * 1260 * NOTE: While the rates array is kept intact, this will wipe all of the 1261 * driver_data fields in info, so it's up to the driver to restore 1262 * any fields it needs after calling this helper. 1263 */ 1264 static inline void 1265 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1266 { 1267 int i; 1268 1269 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1270 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates)); 1271 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1272 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates)); 1273 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8); 1274 /* clear the rate counts */ 1275 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++) 1276 info->status.rates[i].count = 0; 1277 memset_after(&info->status, 0, rates); 1278 } 1279 1280 1281 /** 1282 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags 1283 * 1284 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status. 1285 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame. 1286 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED. 1287 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware. 1288 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame, 1289 * verification has been done by the hardware. 1290 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame. 1291 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection 1292 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that. 1293 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this 1294 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection. 1295 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame 1296 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set) 1297 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did 1298 * de-duplication by itself. 1299 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on 1300 * the frame. 1301 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on 1302 * the frame. 1303 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1304 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU 1305 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS 1306 * merging. 1307 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1308 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU 1309 * (including FCS) was received. 1310 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1311 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received. 1312 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present. 1313 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU) 1314 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference 1315 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for 1316 * each A-MPDU 1317 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all 1318 * subframes of a single A-MPDU 1319 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU 1320 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected 1321 * on this subframe 1322 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC 1323 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field) 1324 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was 1325 * done by the hardware 1326 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without 1327 * processing it in any regular way. 1328 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1329 * them for sniffing purposes. 1330 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except 1331 * monitor interfaces. 1332 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1333 * them for sniffing purposes. 1334 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU 1335 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons. 1336 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g. 1337 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while 1338 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to 1339 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU 1340 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be 1341 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be 1342 * interleaved with other frames. 1343 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific 1344 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by 1345 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap. 1346 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before. 1347 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as 1348 * the first subframe. 1349 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must 1350 * be done in the hardware. 1351 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this 1352 * frame 1353 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known 1354 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present 1355 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in 1356 * 1357 * - DATA3_DATA_MCS 1358 * - DATA3_DATA_DCM 1359 * - DATA3_CODING 1360 * - DATA5_GI 1361 * - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC 1362 * - DATA6_NSTS 1363 * - DATA3_STBC 1364 * 1365 * from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data) 1366 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present 1367 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu) 1368 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present 1369 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with 1370 * the "0-length PSDU" field included there. The value for it is 1371 * in &struct ieee80211_rx_status. Note that if this value isn't 1372 * known the frame shouldn't be reported. 1373 * @RX_FLAG_8023: the frame has an 802.3 header (decap offload performed by 1374 * hardware or driver) 1375 */ 1376 enum mac80211_rx_flags { 1377 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0), 1378 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1), 1379 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2), 1380 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3), 1381 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4), 1382 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5), 1383 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6), 1384 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7), 1385 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8), 1386 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9), 1387 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10), 1388 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11), 1389 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12), 1390 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13), 1391 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14), 1392 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(15), 1393 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(16), 1394 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(17), 1395 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18), 1396 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19), 1397 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(20), 1398 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21), 1399 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22), 1400 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23), 1401 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24), 1402 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25), 1403 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE = BIT(26), 1404 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU = BIT(27), 1405 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG = BIT(28), 1406 RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU = BIT(29), 1407 RX_FLAG_8023 = BIT(30), 1408 }; 1409 1410 /** 1411 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags 1412 * 1413 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame 1414 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used 1415 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, 1416 * if the driver fills this value it should add 1417 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT 1418 * to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact. 1419 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used 1420 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3 1421 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed 1422 */ 1423 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags { 1424 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0), 1425 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2), 1426 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3), 1427 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5), 1428 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6), 1429 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7), 1430 }; 1431 1432 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4 1433 1434 enum mac80211_rx_encoding { 1435 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0, 1436 RX_ENC_HT, 1437 RX_ENC_VHT, 1438 RX_ENC_HE, 1439 }; 1440 1441 /** 1442 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status 1443 * 1444 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset 1445 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received 1446 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb). 1447 * 1448 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function 1449 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware. 1450 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is 1451 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache. 1452 * @ack_tx_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp for the ack TX in nanoseconds. Only 1453 * needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action frames. 1454 * Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled. 1455 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use 1456 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation 1457 * @band: the active band when this frame was received 1458 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz 1459 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed 1460 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting. 1461 * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz. 1462 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or 1463 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags 1464 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_* 1465 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength 1466 * values were filled. 1467 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't 1468 * support dB or unspecified units) 1469 * @antenna: antenna used 1470 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if 1471 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT) 1472 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only) 1473 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\* 1474 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding 1475 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw 1476 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags 1477 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc 1478 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi 1479 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value 1480 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211 1481 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for 1482 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU 1483 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC 1484 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU 1485 * @link_valid: if the link which is identified by @link_id is valid. This flag 1486 * is set only when connection is MLO. 1487 * @link_id: id of the link used to receive the packet. This is used along with 1488 * @link_valid. 1489 */ 1490 struct ieee80211_rx_status { 1491 u64 mactime; 1492 union { 1493 u64 boottime_ns; 1494 ktime_t ack_tx_hwtstamp; 1495 }; 1496 u32 device_timestamp; 1497 u32 ampdu_reference; 1498 u32 flag; 1499 u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1; 1500 u8 enc_flags; 1501 u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3; 1502 u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1; 1503 u8 rate_idx; 1504 u8 nss; 1505 u8 rx_flags; 1506 u8 band; 1507 u8 antenna; 1508 s8 signal; 1509 u8 chains; 1510 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS]; 1511 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc; 1512 u8 zero_length_psdu_type; 1513 u8 link_valid:1, link_id:4; 1514 }; 1515 1516 static inline u32 1517 ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status) 1518 { 1519 return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) + 1520 (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0); 1521 } 1522 1523 /** 1524 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information 1525 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace 1526 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more 1527 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that) 1528 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed 1529 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace 1530 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment) 1531 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1! 1532 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI 1533 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace 1534 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done 1535 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the 1536 * @data field. 1537 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that 1538 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd 1539 * length 1540 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data 1541 * 1542 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before 1543 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns 1544 * data. 1545 */ 1546 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap { 1547 u32 present; 1548 u8 align; 1549 u8 oui[3]; 1550 u8 subns; 1551 u8 pad; 1552 u16 len; 1553 u8 data[]; 1554 } __packed; 1555 1556 /** 1557 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags 1558 * 1559 * Flags to define PHY configuration options 1560 * 1561 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this 1562 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets 1563 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags! 1564 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only). 1565 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2, 1566 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to 1567 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames. 1568 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states, 1569 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support" 1570 * for more. 1571 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set 1572 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but 1573 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will 1574 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but 1575 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active. 1576 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main 1577 * operating channel. 1578 */ 1579 enum ieee80211_conf_flags { 1580 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0), 1581 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1), 1582 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2), 1583 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3), 1584 }; 1585 1586 1587 /** 1588 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed 1589 * 1590 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed 1591 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed 1592 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed 1593 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed 1594 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed 1595 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed 1596 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed 1597 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed 1598 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1599 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1600 */ 1601 enum ieee80211_conf_changed { 1602 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1), 1603 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2), 1604 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3), 1605 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4), 1606 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5), 1607 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6), 1608 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7), 1609 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8), 1610 }; 1611 1612 /** 1613 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode 1614 * 1615 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic 1616 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off 1617 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static 1618 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic 1619 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use 1620 */ 1621 enum ieee80211_smps_mode { 1622 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC, 1623 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF, 1624 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC, 1625 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC, 1626 1627 /* keep last */ 1628 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES, 1629 }; 1630 1631 /** 1632 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device 1633 * 1634 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware. 1635 * 1636 * @flags: configuration flags defined above 1637 * 1638 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval 1639 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use 1640 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon 1641 * has been received and the DTIM period is known. 1642 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the 1643 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when 1644 * the CONF_PS flag is set. 1645 * 1646 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility 1647 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces 1648 * 1649 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to 1650 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled 1651 * 1652 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame 1653 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11, 1654 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries 1655 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short" 1656 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the 1657 * number of transmissions not the number of retries 1658 * 1659 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that 1660 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not 1661 * configured for an HT channel. 1662 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1663 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1664 */ 1665 struct ieee80211_conf { 1666 u32 flags; 1667 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout; 1668 1669 u16 listen_interval; 1670 u8 ps_dtim_period; 1671 1672 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count; 1673 1674 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1675 bool radar_enabled; 1676 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 1677 }; 1678 1679 /** 1680 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data 1681 * 1682 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch 1683 * operation. 1684 * 1685 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization 1686 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch 1687 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter 1688 * the driver passed into mac80211. 1689 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the 1690 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211. 1691 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the 1692 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP. 1693 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to 1694 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event 1695 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in 1696 * current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new 1697 * channel, expressed in TU. 1698 */ 1699 struct ieee80211_channel_switch { 1700 u64 timestamp; 1701 u32 device_timestamp; 1702 bool block_tx; 1703 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1704 u8 count; 1705 u32 delay; 1706 }; 1707 1708 /** 1709 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags 1710 * 1711 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering 1712 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups 1713 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality 1714 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor 1715 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and 1716 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached. 1717 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this 1718 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition, 1719 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is 1720 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces. 1721 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes 1722 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even 1723 * this is not pure P2P vif. 1724 */ 1725 enum ieee80211_vif_flags { 1726 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0), 1727 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1), 1728 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2), 1729 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3), 1730 }; 1731 1732 1733 /** 1734 * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags 1735 * 1736 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled 1737 * The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211. 1738 * It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface. 1739 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload 1740 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED: rx encapsulation offload is enabled 1741 * The driver supports passing received 802.11 frames as 802.3 frames to 1742 * mac80211. 1743 */ 1744 1745 enum ieee80211_offload_flags { 1746 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED = BIT(0), 1747 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR = BIT(1), 1748 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED = BIT(2), 1749 }; 1750 1751 /** 1752 * struct ieee80211_vif_cfg - interface configuration 1753 * @assoc: association status 1754 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS or not 1755 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created 1756 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by 1757 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations. 1758 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true 1759 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The 1760 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here. 1761 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here 1762 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass. 1763 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this 1764 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list 1765 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case. 1766 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode. 1767 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid. 1768 * @s1g: BSS is S1G BSS (affects Association Request format). 1769 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the 1770 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what 1771 * your driver/device needs to do. 1772 * @ap_addr: AP MLD address, or BSSID for non-MLO connections 1773 * (station mode only) 1774 */ 1775 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg { 1776 /* association related data */ 1777 bool assoc, ibss_joined; 1778 bool ibss_creator; 1779 bool ps; 1780 u16 aid; 1781 1782 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN]; 1783 int arp_addr_cnt; 1784 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN]; 1785 size_t ssid_len; 1786 bool s1g; 1787 bool idle; 1788 u8 ap_addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 1789 }; 1790 1791 /** 1792 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data 1793 * 1794 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver 1795 * use during the life of a virtual interface. 1796 * 1797 * @type: type of this virtual interface 1798 * @cfg: vif configuration, see &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg 1799 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own 1800 * or the BSS we're associated to 1801 * @link_conf: in case of MLD, the per-link BSS configuration, 1802 * indexed by link ID 1803 * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO. 1804 * @active_links: The bitmap of active links, or 0 for non-MLO. 1805 * The driver shouldn't change this directly, but use the 1806 * API calls meant for that purpose. 1807 * @addr: address of this interface 1808 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p 1809 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively 1810 * @netdev_features: tx netdev features supported by the hardware for this 1811 * vif. mac80211 initializes this to hw->netdev_features, and the driver 1812 * can mask out specific tx features. mac80211 will handle software fixup 1813 * for masked offloads (GSO, CSUM) 1814 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface, 1815 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added 1816 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed 1817 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field 1818 * @offload_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface. 1819 * These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface, 1820 * .change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver 1821 * within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change 1822 * restrictions. 1823 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC 1824 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only 1825 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per 1826 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual 1827 * monitor interface (if that is requested.) 1828 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this 1829 * interface. 1830 * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211 1831 * for this interface. 1832 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 1833 * sizeof(void \*). 1834 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue 1835 * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped, 1836 * protected by fq->lock. 1837 * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see 1838 * &enum ieee80211_offload_flags. 1839 * @mbssid_tx_vif: Pointer to the transmitting interface if MBSSID is enabled. 1840 */ 1841 struct ieee80211_vif { 1842 enum nl80211_iftype type; 1843 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg cfg; 1844 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf; 1845 struct ieee80211_bss_conf __rcu *link_conf[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]; 1846 u16 valid_links, active_links; 1847 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 1848 bool p2p; 1849 1850 u8 cab_queue; 1851 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS]; 1852 1853 struct ieee80211_txq *txq; 1854 1855 netdev_features_t netdev_features; 1856 u32 driver_flags; 1857 u32 offload_flags; 1858 1859 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 1860 struct dentry *debugfs_dir; 1861 #endif 1862 1863 bool probe_req_reg; 1864 bool rx_mcast_action_reg; 1865 1866 bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS]; 1867 1868 struct ieee80211_vif *mbssid_tx_vif; 1869 1870 /* must be last */ 1871 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 1872 }; 1873 1874 #define for_each_vif_active_link(vif, link, link_id) \ 1875 for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((vif)->link_conf); link_id++) \ 1876 if ((!(vif)->active_links || \ 1877 (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) && \ 1878 (link = rcu_dereference((vif)->link_conf[link_id]))) 1879 1880 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 1881 { 1882 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH 1883 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT; 1884 #endif 1885 return false; 1886 } 1887 1888 /** 1889 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev 1890 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for 1891 * 1892 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 1893 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev. 1894 * 1895 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't 1896 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor 1897 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.) 1898 */ 1899 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev); 1900 1901 /** 1902 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif 1903 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for 1904 * 1905 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 1906 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif. 1907 * This can also be useful to get the netdev associated to a vif. 1908 */ 1909 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 1910 1911 /** 1912 * lockdep_vif_mutex_held - for lockdep checks on link poiners 1913 * @vif: the interface to check 1914 */ 1915 static inline bool lockdep_vif_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 1916 { 1917 return lockdep_is_held(&ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(vif)->mtx); 1918 } 1919 1920 #define link_conf_dereference_protected(vif, link_id) \ 1921 rcu_dereference_protected((vif)->link_conf[link_id], \ 1922 lockdep_vif_mutex_held(vif)) 1923 1924 #define link_conf_dereference_check(vif, link_id) \ 1925 rcu_dereference_check((vif)->link_conf[link_id], \ 1926 lockdep_vif_mutex_held(vif)) 1927 1928 /** 1929 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags 1930 * 1931 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver 1932 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf. 1933 * 1934 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the 1935 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this 1936 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs 1937 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC. 1938 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by 1939 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC 1940 * generation in software. 1941 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates 1942 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key. 1943 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a 1944 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames 1945 * (MFP) to be done in software. 1946 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver 1947 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV 1948 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with 1949 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does 1950 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or 1951 * MIC. 1952 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received 1953 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware 1954 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames 1955 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and 1956 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with 1957 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the 1958 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW. 1959 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the 1960 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation 1961 * only for management frames (MFP). 1962 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the 1963 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always 1964 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled. 1965 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for 1966 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with 1967 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key. 1968 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation. 1969 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver 1970 * for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number 1971 * generation only 1972 */ 1973 enum ieee80211_key_flags { 1974 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0), 1975 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1), 1976 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2), 1977 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3), 1978 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4), 1979 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5), 1980 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6), 1981 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7), 1982 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8), 1983 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX = BIT(9), 1984 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE = BIT(10), 1985 }; 1986 1987 /** 1988 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information 1989 * 1990 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by 1991 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops. 1992 * 1993 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver 1994 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be 1995 * encrypted in hardware. 1996 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector. 1997 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it 1998 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO) 1999 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags. 2000 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3) 2001 * @keylen: key material length 2002 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte) 2003 * data block: 2004 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits) 2005 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits) 2006 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits) 2007 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type 2008 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type 2009 * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, or -1 for non-MLO or pairwise keys 2010 */ 2011 struct ieee80211_key_conf { 2012 atomic64_t tx_pn; 2013 u32 cipher; 2014 u8 icv_len; 2015 u8 iv_len; 2016 u8 hw_key_idx; 2017 s8 keyidx; 2018 u16 flags; 2019 s8 link_id; 2020 u8 keylen; 2021 u8 key[]; 2022 }; 2023 2024 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16 2025 2026 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff)) 2027 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff)) 2028 2029 /** 2030 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter 2031 * 2032 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order 2033 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2034 * reverse order than in packet) 2035 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2036 * reverse order than in packet) 2037 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2038 * reverse order than in packet) 2039 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2040 * reverse order than in packet) 2041 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys 2042 */ 2043 struct ieee80211_key_seq { 2044 union { 2045 struct { 2046 u32 iv32; 2047 u16 iv16; 2048 } tkip; 2049 struct { 2050 u8 pn[6]; 2051 } ccmp; 2052 struct { 2053 u8 pn[6]; 2054 } aes_cmac; 2055 struct { 2056 u8 pn[6]; 2057 } aes_gmac; 2058 struct { 2059 u8 pn[6]; 2060 } gcmp; 2061 struct { 2062 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN]; 2063 u8 seq_len; 2064 } hw; 2065 }; 2066 }; 2067 2068 /** 2069 * enum set_key_cmd - key command 2070 * 2071 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 2072 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added. 2073 * 2074 * @SET_KEY: a key is set 2075 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled 2076 */ 2077 enum set_key_cmd { 2078 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY, 2079 }; 2080 2081 /** 2082 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state 2083 * 2084 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all, 2085 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions 2086 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state 2087 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated 2088 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated 2089 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X) 2090 */ 2091 enum ieee80211_sta_state { 2092 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */ 2093 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST, 2094 IEEE80211_STA_NONE, 2095 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH, 2096 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC, 2097 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED, 2098 }; 2099 2100 /** 2101 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth 2102 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz 2103 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz 2104 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz 2105 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz 2106 * (including 80+80 MHz) 2107 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320: station can receive up to 320 MHz 2108 * 2109 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized 2110 * correctly, the values must be sorted. 2111 */ 2112 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth { 2113 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0, 2114 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40, 2115 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80, 2116 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160, 2117 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320, 2118 }; 2119 2120 /** 2121 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table 2122 * 2123 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update 2124 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default. 2125 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control. 2126 */ 2127 struct ieee80211_sta_rates { 2128 struct rcu_head rcu_head; 2129 struct { 2130 s8 idx; 2131 u8 count; 2132 u8 count_cts; 2133 u8 count_rts; 2134 u16 flags; 2135 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE]; 2136 }; 2137 2138 /** 2139 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration 2140 * 2141 * Used to configure txpower for station. 2142 * 2143 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames 2144 * to the STA. 2145 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power 2146 * will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC 2147 * %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power. 2148 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for 2149 * per peer TPC. 2150 */ 2151 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr { 2152 s16 power; 2153 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type; 2154 }; 2155 2156 /** 2157 * struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates - info that is aggregated from active links 2158 * 2159 * Used for any per-link data that needs to be aggregated and updated in the 2160 * main &struct ieee80211_sta when updated or the active links change. 2161 * 2162 * @max_amsdu_len: indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes. 2163 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble. 2164 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply: 2165 * 2166 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the 2167 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes. 2168 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal 2169 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes. 2170 * 2171 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level 2172 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section 2173 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2). 2174 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control. 2175 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID 2176 */ 2177 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates { 2178 u16 max_amsdu_len; 2179 2180 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len; 2181 u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS]; 2182 }; 2183 2184 /** 2185 * struct ieee80211_link_sta - station Link specific info 2186 * All link specific info for a STA link for a non MLD STA(single) 2187 * or a MLD STA(multiple entries) are stored here. 2188 * 2189 * @sta: reference to owning STA 2190 * @addr: MAC address of the Link STA. For non-MLO STA this is same as the addr 2191 * in ieee80211_sta. For MLO Link STA this addr can be same or different 2192 * from addr in ieee80211_sta (representing MLD STA addr) 2193 * @link_id: the link ID for this link STA (0 for deflink) 2194 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic) 2195 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates 2196 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 2197 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 2198 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA 2199 * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities 2200 * @eht_cap: EHT capabilities of this STA 2201 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with 2202 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the 2203 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode 2204 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after 2205 * the station moves to associated state. 2206 * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration 2207 * 2208 */ 2209 struct ieee80211_link_sta { 2210 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2211 2212 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN]; 2213 u8 link_id; 2214 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 2215 2216 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 2217 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap; 2218 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap; 2219 struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap; 2220 struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa; 2221 struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap eht_cap; 2222 2223 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates agg; 2224 2225 u8 rx_nss; 2226 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth; 2227 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr; 2228 }; 2229 2230 /** 2231 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry 2232 * 2233 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly 2234 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in 2235 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must 2236 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly, 2237 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a 2238 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it. 2239 * This also represents the MLD STA in case of MLO association 2240 * and holds pointers to various link STA's 2241 * 2242 * @addr: MAC address 2243 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP 2244 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU 2245 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us. 2246 * Can be modified by driver. 2247 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does, 2248 * otherwise always false) 2249 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 2250 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information. 2251 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid 2252 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in 2253 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*. 2254 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported. 2255 * @rates: rate control selection table 2256 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer 2257 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only 2258 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place. 2259 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not. 2260 * @mlo: indicates whether the STA is MLO station. 2261 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single 2262 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means 2263 * unlimited. 2264 * @cur: currently valid data as aggregated from the active links 2265 * For non MLO STA it will point to the deflink data. For MLO STA 2266 * ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates() must be called to update it. 2267 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not. 2268 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues; note that the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) 2269 * is used for non-data frames 2270 * @deflink: This holds the default link STA information, for non MLO STA all link 2271 * specific STA information is accessed through @deflink or through 2272 * link[0] which points to address of @deflink. For MLO Link STA 2273 * the first added link STA will point to deflink. 2274 * @link: reference to Link Sta entries. For Non MLO STA, except 1st link, 2275 * i.e link[0] all links would be assigned to NULL by default and 2276 * would access link information via @deflink or link[0]. For MLO 2277 * STA, first link STA being added will point its link pointer to 2278 * @deflink address and remaining would be allocated and the address 2279 * would be assigned to link[link_id] where link_id is the id assigned 2280 * by the AP. 2281 * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO 2282 */ 2283 struct ieee80211_sta { 2284 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN]; 2285 u16 aid; 2286 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 2287 bool wme; 2288 u8 uapsd_queues; 2289 u8 max_sp; 2290 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates; 2291 bool tdls; 2292 bool tdls_initiator; 2293 bool mfp; 2294 bool mlo; 2295 u8 max_amsdu_subframes; 2296 2297 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates *cur; 2298 2299 bool support_p2p_ps; 2300 2301 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1]; 2302 2303 u16 valid_links; 2304 struct ieee80211_link_sta deflink; 2305 struct ieee80211_link_sta __rcu *link[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]; 2306 2307 /* must be last */ 2308 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2309 }; 2310 2311 #ifdef CONFIG_LOCKDEP 2312 bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 2313 #else 2314 static inline bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta) 2315 { 2316 return true; 2317 } 2318 #endif 2319 2320 #define link_sta_dereference_protected(sta, link_id) \ 2321 rcu_dereference_protected((sta)->link[link_id], \ 2322 lockdep_sta_mutex_held(sta)) 2323 2324 #define link_sta_dereference_check(sta, link_id) \ 2325 rcu_dereference_check((sta)->link[link_id], \ 2326 lockdep_sta_mutex_held(sta)) 2327 2328 #define for_each_sta_active_link(vif, sta, link_sta, link_id) \ 2329 for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((sta)->link); link_id++) \ 2330 if ((!(vif)->active_links || \ 2331 (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) && \ 2332 ((link_sta) = link_sta_dereference_protected(sta, link_id))) 2333 2334 /** 2335 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command 2336 * 2337 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 2338 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition. 2339 * 2340 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping 2341 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up 2342 */ 2343 enum sta_notify_cmd { 2344 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE, 2345 }; 2346 2347 /** 2348 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data 2349 * 2350 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and 2351 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU. 2352 */ 2353 struct ieee80211_tx_control { 2354 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2355 }; 2356 2357 /** 2358 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue 2359 * 2360 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 2361 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue 2362 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue), 2363 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled) 2364 * @ac: the AC for this queue 2365 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size 2366 * 2367 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling 2368 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). 2369 */ 2370 struct ieee80211_txq { 2371 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 2372 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2373 u8 tid; 2374 u8 ac; 2375 2376 /* must be last */ 2377 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2378 }; 2379 2380 /** 2381 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags 2382 * 2383 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to 2384 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning 2385 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting 2386 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule, 2387 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully. 2388 * 2389 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL: 2390 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be 2391 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm 2392 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace 2393 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control 2394 * algorithm. 2395 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of 2396 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have 2397 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config 2398 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot 2399 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for 2400 * CCK frames. 2401 * 2402 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS: 2403 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include 2404 * the FCS at the end. 2405 * 2406 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING: 2407 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames 2408 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others 2409 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used 2410 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and 2411 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that 2412 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(). 2413 * 2414 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC: 2415 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We 2416 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal. 2417 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead. 2418 * 2419 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM: 2420 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from 2421 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized 2422 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set. 2423 * 2424 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT: 2425 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h 2426 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC 2427 * 2428 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION: 2429 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation. 2430 * 2431 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS: 2432 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep). 2433 * 2434 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK: 2435 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies 2436 * stack support for dynamic PS. 2437 * 2438 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS: 2439 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS. 2440 * 2441 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE: 2442 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w). 2443 * 2444 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS: 2445 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to 2446 * the stack. 2447 * 2448 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR: 2449 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including 2450 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss. 2451 * 2452 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC: 2453 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e. 2454 * dtim_period). 2455 * 2456 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports 2457 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If 2458 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not 2459 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still 2460 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag 2461 * only in that case. 2462 * 2463 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device 2464 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When 2465 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected 2466 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames. 2467 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure 2468 * the PS mode of connected stations. 2469 * 2470 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session 2471 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in 2472 * software. 2473 * 2474 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of 2475 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only 2476 * active interfaces. 2477 * 2478 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to 2479 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as 2480 * desired (and thus have them named as desired). 2481 * 2482 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the 2483 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically 2484 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if 2485 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its 2486 * supported cipher suites. 2487 * 2488 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit, 2489 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration 2490 * for frames. 2491 * 2492 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface 2493 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC) 2494 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue 2495 * control for more details. 2496 * 2497 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate 2498 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm. 2499 * 2500 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any 2501 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface 2502 * is supported. 2503 * 2504 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames 2505 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon. 2506 * 2507 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates 2508 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not 2509 * using aggregation for such frames.) 2510 * 2511 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA) 2512 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support 2513 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the 2514 * CSA frame. 2515 * 2516 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload 2517 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first. 2518 * 2519 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands 2520 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band. 2521 * 2522 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth 2523 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel. 2524 * 2525 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs 2526 * within A-MPDU. 2527 * 2528 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status 2529 * for sent beacons. 2530 * 2531 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each 2532 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified 2533 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station 2534 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time. 2535 * 2536 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the 2537 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in 2538 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session 2539 * timeout. 2540 * 2541 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX, 2542 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics. 2543 * 2544 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated 2545 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support. 2546 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must 2547 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting 2548 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta. 2549 * 2550 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list 2551 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU. 2552 * 2553 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event 2554 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such 2555 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver 2556 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout. 2557 * 2558 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself. 2559 * The stack will not do fragmentation. 2560 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well. 2561 * 2562 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on 2563 * TDLS links. 2564 * 2565 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the 2566 * mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a 2567 * deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no 2568 * beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the 2569 * virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of 2570 * the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the 2571 * deauthentication frame might not be transmitted. 2572 * 2573 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't 2574 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug. 2575 * 2576 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of 2577 * course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with. 2578 * 2579 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT 2580 * extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if 2581 * the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW 2582 * but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver. 2583 * See also the documentation for that flag. 2584 * 2585 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all 2586 * MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use 2587 * TXQs to start with. 2588 * 2589 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU 2590 * length in tx status information 2591 * 2592 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 2593 * 2594 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 2595 * only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set. 2596 * 2597 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only 2598 * aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx 2599 * A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID. 2600 * 2601 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation 2602 * offload 2603 * 2604 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports rx decapsulation 2605 * offload 2606 * 2607 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP: Hardware supports concurrent rx 2608 * decapsulation offload and passing raw 802.11 frames for monitor iface. 2609 * If this is supported, the driver must pass both 802.3 frames for real 2610 * usage and 802.11 frames with %RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR set for monitor to 2611 * the stack. 2612 * 2613 * @IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION: HW/driver has support for BSS color 2614 * collision detection and doesn't need it in software. 2615 * 2616 * @IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX: Hardware/driver handles transmitting 2617 * multicast frames on all links, mac80211 should not do that. 2618 * 2619 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays 2620 */ 2621 enum ieee80211_hw_flags { 2622 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL, 2623 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS, 2624 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING, 2625 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC, 2626 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM, 2627 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC, 2628 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT, 2629 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION, 2630 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS, 2631 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK, 2632 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS, 2633 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE, 2634 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF, 2635 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF, 2636 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL, 2637 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT, 2638 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS, 2639 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR, 2640 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL, 2641 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK, 2642 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, 2643 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW, 2644 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE, 2645 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF, 2646 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY, 2647 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES, 2648 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA, 2649 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS, 2650 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS, 2651 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW, 2652 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU, 2653 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS, 2654 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR, 2655 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER, 2656 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS, 2657 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU, 2658 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST, 2659 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK, 2660 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG, 2661 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA, 2662 IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, 2663 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP, 2664 IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ, 2665 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW, 2666 IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ, 2667 IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN, 2668 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID, 2669 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID, 2670 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT, 2671 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD, 2672 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD, 2673 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP, 2674 IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION, 2675 IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX, 2676 2677 /* keep last, obviously */ 2678 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS 2679 }; 2680 2681 /** 2682 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state 2683 * 2684 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware 2685 * information for an 802.11 PHY. 2686 * 2687 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this 2688 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev 2689 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV() 2690 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported 2691 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here. 2692 * 2693 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use. 2694 * 2695 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use 2696 * along with this structure. 2697 * 2698 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags. 2699 * 2700 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb 2701 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.) 2702 * 2703 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb. 2704 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs. 2705 * 2706 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used 2707 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB 2708 * 2709 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval 2710 * that HW supports 2711 * 2712 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for 2713 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these 2714 * queues need to have configurable access parameters. 2715 * 2716 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware. 2717 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be 2718 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw(). 2719 * 2720 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2721 * within &struct ieee80211_vif. 2722 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2723 * within &struct ieee80211_sta. 2724 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2725 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf. 2726 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2727 * within @struct ieee80211_txq. 2728 * 2729 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw 2730 * can handle. 2731 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages 2732 * the hw can report back. 2733 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage 2734 * 2735 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of 2736 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver 2737 * aggregation. 2738 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the 2739 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering 2740 * it shouldn't be set. 2741 * 2742 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an 2743 * aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll 2744 * advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if 2745 * the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N 2746 * with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012). 2747 * For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used. 2748 * 2749 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum 2750 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list. 2751 * 2752 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX 2753 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set) 2754 * 2755 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW 2756 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't 2757 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only 2758 * adding _BW is supported today. 2759 * 2760 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports, 2761 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH. 2762 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values. 2763 * 2764 * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags 2765 * 2766 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the 2767 * @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp 2768 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status 2769 * device_timestamp. 2770 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a 2771 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a 2772 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value. 2773 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the 2774 * radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set. 2775 * 2776 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created 2777 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211, 2778 * other features will be rejected during HW registration. 2779 * 2780 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate 2781 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery- 2782 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap. 2783 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means 2784 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means 2785 * neither enabled. 2786 * 2787 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may 2788 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA. 2789 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values. 2790 * 2791 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the 2792 * device. 2793 * 2794 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from 2795 * them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed, 2796 * unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers. 2797 * 2798 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while 2799 * refilling deficit of each TXQ. 2800 * 2801 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set. 2802 * 2803 * @tx_power_levels: a list of power levels supported by the wifi hardware. 2804 * The power levels can be specified either as integer or fractions. 2805 * The power level at idx 0 shall be the maximum positive power level. 2806 * 2807 * @max_txpwr_levels_idx: the maximum valid idx of 'tx_power_levels' list. 2808 */ 2809 struct ieee80211_hw { 2810 struct ieee80211_conf conf; 2811 struct wiphy *wiphy; 2812 const char *rate_control_algorithm; 2813 void *priv; 2814 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)]; 2815 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom; 2816 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom; 2817 int vif_data_size; 2818 int sta_data_size; 2819 int chanctx_data_size; 2820 int txq_data_size; 2821 u16 queues; 2822 u16 max_listen_interval; 2823 s8 max_signal; 2824 u8 max_rates; 2825 u8 max_report_rates; 2826 u8 max_rate_tries; 2827 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 2828 u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes; 2829 u8 max_tx_fragments; 2830 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue; 2831 u8 radiotap_mcs_details; 2832 u16 radiotap_vht_details; 2833 struct { 2834 int units_pos; 2835 s16 accuracy; 2836 } radiotap_timestamp; 2837 netdev_features_t netdev_features; 2838 u8 uapsd_queues; 2839 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len; 2840 u8 max_nan_de_entries; 2841 u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift; 2842 u8 weight_multiplier; 2843 u32 max_mtu; 2844 const s8 *tx_power_levels; 2845 u8 max_txpwr_levels_idx; 2846 }; 2847 2848 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2849 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 2850 { 2851 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags); 2852 } 2853 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 2854 2855 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2856 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 2857 { 2858 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags); 2859 } 2860 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 2861 2862 /** 2863 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request 2864 * 2865 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie) 2866 * @req: cfg80211 request. 2867 */ 2868 struct ieee80211_scan_request { 2869 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies; 2870 2871 /* Keep last */ 2872 struct cfg80211_scan_request req; 2873 }; 2874 2875 /** 2876 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters 2877 * 2878 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from 2879 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request 2880 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode 2881 * @status: channel-switch response status 2882 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received 2883 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 2884 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 2885 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template 2886 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb 2887 */ 2888 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params { 2889 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2890 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef; 2891 u8 action_code; 2892 u32 status; 2893 u32 timestamp; 2894 u16 switch_time; 2895 u16 switch_timeout; 2896 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb; 2897 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie; 2898 }; 2899 2900 /** 2901 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy 2902 * 2903 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query 2904 * 2905 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective 2906 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private 2907 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should 2908 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this 2909 * is already used internally by mac80211. 2910 * 2911 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy. 2912 */ 2913 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy); 2914 2915 /** 2916 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware 2917 * 2918 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for 2919 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 2920 */ 2921 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev) 2922 { 2923 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev); 2924 } 2925 2926 /** 2927 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware 2928 * 2929 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for 2930 * @addr: the address to set 2931 */ 2932 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr) 2933 { 2934 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN); 2935 } 2936 2937 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 2938 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2939 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 2940 { 2941 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0)) 2942 return NULL; 2943 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx]; 2944 } 2945 2946 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 2947 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2948 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 2949 { 2950 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0) 2951 return NULL; 2952 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx]; 2953 } 2954 2955 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 2956 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 2957 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx) 2958 { 2959 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0) 2960 return NULL; 2961 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx]; 2962 } 2963 2964 /** 2965 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb 2966 * @hw: the hardware 2967 * @skb: the skb 2968 * 2969 * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure 2970 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported. 2971 */ 2972 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 2973 2974 /** 2975 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration 2976 * 2977 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware 2978 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations. 2979 * 2980 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given 2981 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and 2982 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL 2983 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to 2984 * the station information for the peer for individual keys. 2985 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when 2986 * VLANs are configured for an access point. 2987 * 2988 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx 2989 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf 2990 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function. 2991 * 2992 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if 2993 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be 2994 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the 2995 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range. 2996 * 2997 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is 2998 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if 2999 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the 3000 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software. 3001 * 3002 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed. 3003 * 3004 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key 3005 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any 3006 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather 3007 * based on the receive flags. 3008 * 3009 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key 3010 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key() 3011 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate 3012 * keys. 3013 * 3014 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption 3015 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key 3016 * handler. 3017 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key. 3018 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The 3019 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did 3020 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is 3021 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this 3022 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16. 3023 * 3024 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index 3025 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required 3026 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses). 3027 * 3028 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag 3029 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following 3030 * requirements: 3031 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to mac80211 3032 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been completed, 3033 2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued 3034 at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits), 3035 3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command 3036 encrypted with the new key when also needing 3037 @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV and 3038 4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted. 3039 Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver. 3040 */ 3041 3042 /** 3043 * DOC: Powersave support 3044 * 3045 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations. 3046 * 3047 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself, 3048 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware 3049 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode 3050 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status. 3051 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary, 3052 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required 3053 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when 3054 * it finds traffic directed to it. 3055 * 3056 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in 3057 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused 3058 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking 3059 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it 3060 * back to sleep at appropriate times. 3061 * 3062 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the 3063 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be 3064 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame. 3065 * 3066 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also 3067 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported 3068 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and 3069 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still 3070 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle 3071 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that 3072 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that. 3073 * 3074 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the 3075 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a 3076 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to 3077 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when 3078 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle 3079 * periods. 3080 * 3081 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling 3082 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS 3083 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally, 3084 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the 3085 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support 3086 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the 3087 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value 3088 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable 3089 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS 3090 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave. 3091 * 3092 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling 3093 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the 3094 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS 3095 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To 3096 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames 3097 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled. 3098 * 3099 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with 3100 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK. 3101 */ 3102 3103 /** 3104 * DOC: Beacon filter support 3105 * 3106 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups 3107 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that 3108 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly 3109 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the 3110 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That 3111 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information 3112 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed. 3113 * 3114 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER 3115 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support 3116 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When 3117 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the 3118 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss(). 3119 * 3120 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the 3121 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call 3122 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled 3123 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future. 3124 * 3125 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing 3126 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211 3127 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense 3128 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include 3129 * 3130 * - a list of information element IDs 3131 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element 3132 * 3133 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the 3134 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense 3135 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device 3136 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all 3137 * vendor information elements. 3138 * 3139 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information 3140 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon. 3141 * 3142 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing 3143 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing 3144 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and 3145 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136, 3146 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility 3147 * it could also include some currently unused IDs. 3148 * 3149 * 3150 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the 3151 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming 3152 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of 3153 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when 3154 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above 3155 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be 3156 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement 3157 * them as the roaming algorithm requires. 3158 * 3159 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to 3160 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the 3161 * signal strength threshold checking. 3162 */ 3163 3164 /** 3165 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save 3166 * 3167 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve 3168 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism 3169 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009) 3170 * "11.2.3 SM power save". 3171 * 3172 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames 3173 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct 3174 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the 3175 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware 3176 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by 3177 * hardware flags. 3178 * 3179 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211 3180 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS 3181 * turned off otherwise. 3182 * 3183 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate 3184 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config() 3185 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to 3186 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP. 3187 */ 3188 3189 /** 3190 * DOC: Frame filtering 3191 * 3192 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper 3193 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when 3194 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption, 3195 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is 3196 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible. 3197 * 3198 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell 3199 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be 3200 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out. 3201 * 3202 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast() 3203 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list 3204 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces. 3205 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to 3206 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the 3207 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and 3208 * @total_flags with the new flag states. 3209 * 3210 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will 3211 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count 3212 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted 3213 * or dropped. 3214 * 3215 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared. 3216 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_ 3217 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore 3218 * the flag, but not clear it. 3219 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the 3220 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type 3221 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it). 3222 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware 3223 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes 3224 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them, 3225 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag. 3226 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well. 3227 */ 3228 3229 /** 3230 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients 3231 * 3232 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for 3233 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD. 3234 * There currently is no support for sAPSD. 3235 * 3236 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client 3237 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time. 3238 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but 3239 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies 3240 * the driver code. 3241 * 3242 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete 3243 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set, 3244 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for 3245 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames. 3246 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of 3247 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't 3248 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD. 3249 * 3250 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the 3251 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a 3252 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is, 3253 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is 3254 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this 3255 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to 3256 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will 3257 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The 3258 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its 3259 * @sta_notify callback. 3260 * 3261 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up, 3262 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period. 3263 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and 3264 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When 3265 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211 3266 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames 3267 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit 3268 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER 3269 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only 3270 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to 3271 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have 3272 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS. 3273 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is 3274 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer. 3275 * 3276 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by 3277 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them. 3278 * 3279 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi 3280 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up 3281 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being 3282 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong 3283 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be 3284 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to 3285 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can 3286 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it 3287 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames 3288 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again 3289 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked. 3290 * 3291 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any 3292 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is 3293 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any 3294 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up 3295 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when 3296 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service 3297 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called 3298 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are 3299 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting 3300 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames, 3301 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if 3302 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames 3303 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the 3304 * buffers for those TIDs contain. 3305 * 3306 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may 3307 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must 3308 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that 3309 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid 3310 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released 3311 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp() 3312 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway. 3313 * 3314 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211 3315 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags 3316 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 3317 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame. 3318 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case. 3319 * 3320 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data 3321 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as 3322 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame 3323 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed. 3324 */ 3325 3326 /** 3327 * DOC: HW queue control 3328 * 3329 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static 3330 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This 3331 * was problematic for a few reasons: 3332 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames 3333 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly 3334 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames 3335 * 3336 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all 3337 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it 3338 * won't have the same problem with the software queues. 3339 * 3340 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability 3341 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do 3342 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif 3343 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will 3344 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and 3345 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors 3346 * the hardware queue. 3347 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue 3348 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.) 3349 * 3350 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual 3351 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to 3352 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a 3353 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have 3354 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios: 3355 * 3356 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3 3357 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7 3358 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8 3359 * off-channel queue: 9 3360 * 3361 * It would then set up the hardware like this: 3362 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9 3363 * 3364 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows: 3365 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0 3366 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1 3367 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2 3368 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3 3369 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3370 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7. 3371 * 3372 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second 3373 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC. 3374 * 3375 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3376 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the 3377 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when 3378 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode. 3379 */ 3380 3381 /** 3382 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags 3383 * 3384 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be 3385 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the 3386 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested, 3387 * but this has negative impact on power consumption. 3388 * 3389 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested 3390 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by 3391 * multicast address. 3392 * 3393 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the 3394 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them) 3395 * 3396 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set 3397 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them 3398 * 3399 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate 3400 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses 3401 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing 3402 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should 3403 * honour this flag if possible. 3404 * 3405 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this 3406 * station 3407 * 3408 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes 3409 * 3410 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames 3411 * 3412 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames 3413 * 3414 * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames 3415 */ 3416 enum ieee80211_filter_flags { 3417 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1, 3418 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2, 3419 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3, 3420 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4, 3421 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5, 3422 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6, 3423 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7, 3424 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8, 3425 FIF_MCAST_ACTION = 1<<9, 3426 }; 3427 3428 /** 3429 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions 3430 * 3431 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in 3432 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed. 3433 * 3434 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation 3435 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by 3436 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer 3437 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away! 3438 * 3439 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation 3440 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation 3441 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either 3442 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or 3443 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status 3444 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after 3445 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special 3446 * status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE. 3447 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational 3448 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting 3449 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the 3450 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(). 3451 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets, 3452 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call 3453 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the 3454 * session is gone and removes the station. 3455 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped 3456 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and 3457 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers 3458 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called. 3459 */ 3460 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action { 3461 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START, 3462 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP, 3463 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START, 3464 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT, 3465 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH, 3466 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT, 3467 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL, 3468 }; 3469 3470 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1 3471 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2 3472 3473 /** 3474 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters 3475 * 3476 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 3477 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session 3478 * @tid: tid of the BA session 3479 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When 3480 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the 3481 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here. 3482 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the 3483 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or 3484 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3485 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU. 3486 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3487 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to 3488 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START 3489 */ 3490 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params { 3491 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action; 3492 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 3493 u16 tid; 3494 u16 ssn; 3495 u16 buf_size; 3496 bool amsdu; 3497 u16 timeout; 3498 }; 3499 3500 /** 3501 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason 3502 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll 3503 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to 3504 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC 3505 */ 3506 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type { 3507 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL, 3508 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD, 3509 }; 3510 3511 /** 3512 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed 3513 * 3514 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit 3515 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station 3516 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40 3517 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes. 3518 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed. 3519 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer 3520 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about 3521 * the peer. 3522 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed 3523 * by the peer 3524 */ 3525 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed { 3526 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0), 3527 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1), 3528 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2), 3529 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3), 3530 }; 3531 3532 /** 3533 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type 3534 * 3535 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations, 3536 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other 3537 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa). 3538 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC 3539 * operations compared to other operations/flows. 3540 * 3541 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC. 3542 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required 3543 * for sending management frames offchannel. 3544 */ 3545 enum ieee80211_roc_type { 3546 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0, 3547 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX, 3548 }; 3549 3550 /** 3551 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_type - reconfig type 3552 * 3553 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what 3554 * reconfiguration type was completed. 3555 * 3556 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type 3557 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1) 3558 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless 3559 * of wowlan configuration) 3560 */ 3561 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type { 3562 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART, 3563 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND, 3564 }; 3565 3566 /** 3567 * struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info - prepare TX information 3568 * @duration: if non-zero, hint about the required duration, 3569 * only used with the mgd_prepare_tx() method. 3570 * @subtype: frame subtype (auth, (re)assoc, deauth, disassoc) 3571 * @success: whether the frame exchange was successful, only 3572 * used with the mgd_complete_tx() method, and then only 3573 * valid for auth and (re)assoc. 3574 */ 3575 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info { 3576 u16 duration; 3577 u16 subtype; 3578 u8 success:1; 3579 }; 3580 3581 /** 3582 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver 3583 * 3584 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may 3585 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure 3586 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame. 3587 * 3588 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame. 3589 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header. 3590 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on 3591 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should, 3592 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately. 3593 * Must be atomic. 3594 * 3595 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware 3596 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on 3597 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.) 3598 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace, 3599 * or zero. 3600 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address 3601 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device 3602 * is added. 3603 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3604 * 3605 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware 3606 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least 3607 * it must turn off frame reception.) 3608 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects 3609 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue 3610 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback. 3611 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3612 * 3613 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and 3614 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then 3615 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is 3616 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and 3617 * reconfigured at resume time. 3618 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it 3619 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only 3620 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it 3621 * must return 1 from this function. 3622 * 3623 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is 3624 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully 3625 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is 3626 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211 3627 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume. 3628 * 3629 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is 3630 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is 3631 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only 3632 * in suspend(). 3633 * 3634 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is 3635 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start 3636 * and @stop must be implemented. 3637 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before 3638 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the 3639 * interface is given in the conf parameter. 3640 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a 3641 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.) 3642 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3643 * 3644 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback 3645 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be 3646 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep. 3647 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be 3648 * found by the interface iteration callbacks. 3649 * 3650 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down. 3651 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface 3652 * and no monitor interfaces are present. 3653 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware 3654 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets, 3655 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the 3656 * MAC address of the device going away. 3657 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep. 3658 * 3659 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this 3660 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel. 3661 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code 3662 * if it does. The callback can sleep. 3663 * 3664 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS 3665 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low 3666 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters). 3667 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless 3668 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which 3669 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback 3670 * can sleep. 3671 * Note: this callback is called if @vif_cfg_changed or @link_info_changed 3672 * are not implemented. 3673 * 3674 * @vif_cfg_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to interface 3675 * (MLD) parameters from &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg that vary during the 3676 * lifetime of the interface (e.g. assoc status, IP addresses, etc.) 3677 * The @changed parameter indicates which value changed. 3678 * The callback can sleep. 3679 * 3680 * @link_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to link 3681 * parameters from &struct ieee80211_bss_conf that are related to an 3682 * individual link. e.g. legacy/HT/VHT/... rate information. 3683 * The @changed parameter indicates which value changed, and the @link_id 3684 * parameter indicates the link ID. Note that the @link_id will be 0 for 3685 * non-MLO connections. 3686 * The callback can sleep. 3687 * 3688 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration. 3689 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed 3690 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic. 3691 * 3692 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter. 3693 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information. 3694 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep. 3695 * 3696 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter. 3697 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames 3698 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination 3699 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates 3700 * which flags are changed. 3701 * This callback can sleep. 3702 * 3703 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit 3704 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic. 3705 * 3706 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 3707 * This callback is only called between add_interface and 3708 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface 3709 * is enabled. 3710 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added. 3711 * The callback can sleep. 3712 * 3713 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 3714 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers 3715 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY. 3716 * The callback must be atomic. 3717 * 3718 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the 3719 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data 3720 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter. 3721 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify 3722 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(). 3723 * 3724 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for 3725 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP 3726 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it. 3727 * 3728 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start 3729 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel 3730 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's 3731 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure 3732 * that power save is disabled. 3733 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the 3734 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these 3735 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the 3736 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable). 3737 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called; 3738 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to 3739 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code. 3740 * This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1, 3741 * this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a 3742 * software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this 3743 * capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't 3744 * advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is. 3745 * The callback can sleep. 3746 * 3747 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan. 3748 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible), 3749 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call 3750 * ieee80211_scan_completed(). 3751 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new 3752 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended. 3753 * The callback can sleep. 3754 * 3755 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at 3756 * specific intervals. The driver must call the 3757 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results. 3758 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called. 3759 * 3760 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan. 3761 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called. 3762 * 3763 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan 3764 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification. 3765 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR, 3766 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it 3767 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep. 3768 * 3769 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a 3770 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need 3771 * this notification. 3772 * The callback can sleep. 3773 * 3774 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics. 3775 * Returns zero if statistics are available. 3776 * The callback can sleep. 3777 * 3778 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does 3779 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the 3780 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware. 3781 * The callback must be atomic. 3782 * 3783 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this 3784 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the 3785 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG 3786 * should be set as well. 3787 * The callback can sleep. 3788 * 3789 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it) 3790 * The callback can sleep. 3791 * 3792 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station, 3793 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep. 3794 * 3795 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated 3796 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback 3797 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected; 3798 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing 3799 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 3800 * This callback can sleep. 3801 * 3802 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 3803 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback 3804 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This 3805 * callback can sleep. 3806 * 3807 * @link_sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 3808 * when a link is added to a mac80211 station. This callback 3809 * should be within a CPTCFG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This 3810 * callback can sleep. 3811 * For non-MLO the callback will be called once for the deflink with the 3812 * station's directory rather than a separate subdirectory. 3813 * 3814 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an 3815 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating 3816 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag 3817 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic. 3818 * 3819 * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx 3820 * power for the station. 3821 * This callback can sleep. 3822 * 3823 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a 3824 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.) 3825 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove. 3826 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions 3827 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it 3828 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace 3829 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station. 3830 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 3831 * The callback can sleep. 3832 * 3833 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU 3834 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station 3835 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear 3836 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse 3837 * in @sta_state. 3838 * The callback can sleep. 3839 * 3840 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be 3841 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits 3842 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected 3843 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver 3844 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since 3845 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly. 3846 * Must be atomic. 3847 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This 3848 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses 3849 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic. 3850 * 3851 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon 3852 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so 3853 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of 3854 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not 3855 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible. 3856 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211. 3857 * The callback can sleep. 3858 * 3859 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max), 3860 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue. 3861 * Returns a negative error code on failure. 3862 * The callback can sleep. 3863 * 3864 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently, 3865 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a 3866 * required function. 3867 * The callback can sleep. 3868 * 3869 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware. 3870 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a 3871 * required function. 3872 * The callback can sleep. 3873 * 3874 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the 3875 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between 3876 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up 3877 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function. 3878 * The callback can sleep. 3879 * 3880 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize 3881 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This 3882 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of 3883 * TSF synchronization. 3884 * The callback can sleep. 3885 * 3886 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us. 3887 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is 3888 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests. 3889 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon. 3890 * The callback can sleep. 3891 * 3892 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information 3893 * 3894 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also 3895 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration, 3896 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback. 3897 * The callback can sleep. 3898 * 3899 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified 3900 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout 3901 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout 3902 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for 3903 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep. 3904 * 3905 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may 3906 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep. 3907 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep. 3908 * 3909 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure 3910 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap 3911 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces 3912 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues. 3913 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped. 3914 * Note that vif can be NULL. 3915 * The callback can sleep. 3916 * 3917 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel 3918 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this 3919 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate 3920 * completion of the channel switch. 3921 * 3922 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device. 3923 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may 3924 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL 3925 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX). 3926 * 3927 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant). 3928 * 3929 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must 3930 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note 3931 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw 3932 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted 3933 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the 3934 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call 3935 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(). 3936 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and 3937 * must be accepted in this case. 3938 * This callback may sleep. 3939 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is 3940 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep. 3941 * 3942 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes. 3943 * 3944 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes. 3945 * 3946 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware 3947 * queues before entering power save. 3948 * 3949 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection 3950 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled. 3951 * The callback can sleep. 3952 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See 3953 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types. 3954 * The callback must be atomic. 3955 * 3956 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given 3957 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for 3958 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver 3959 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD. 3960 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check 3961 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than 3962 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in 3963 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the 3964 * more-data bit must always be set. 3965 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames 3966 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set. 3967 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the 3968 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In 3969 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 3970 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll 3971 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple 3972 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame. 3973 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be 3974 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send 3975 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for 3976 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the 3977 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP 3978 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function 3979 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP. 3980 * This callback must be atomic. 3981 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames 3982 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211 3983 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames 3984 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set 3985 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case 3986 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder 3987 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 3988 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP 3989 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the 3990 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function. 3991 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the 3992 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set. 3993 * This callback must be atomic. 3994 * 3995 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count. 3996 * 3997 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats. 3998 * 3999 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats 4000 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets. 4001 * 4002 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association 4003 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is 4004 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated 4005 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any 4006 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's 4007 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a 4008 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the 4009 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response 4010 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO. 4011 * For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211 4012 * would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication 4013 * frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO. 4014 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return 4015 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away. 4016 * Additional information is passed in the &struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info 4017 * data. If duration there is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the 4018 * driver the duration for which the operation is requested. 4019 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep. 4020 * @mgd_complete_tx: Notify the driver that the response frame for a previously 4021 * transmitted frame announced with @mgd_prepare_tx was received, the data 4022 * is filled similarly to @mgd_prepare_tx though the duration is not used. 4023 * 4024 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending 4025 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's 4026 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS 4027 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP. 4028 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS 4029 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least 4030 * 2 * (DTIM period). 4031 * The callback is optional and can sleep. 4032 * 4033 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation. 4034 * This callback may sleep. 4035 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction. 4036 * This callback may sleep. 4037 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that 4038 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same 4039 * channel context with different settings 4040 * This callback may sleep. 4041 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound 4042 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping. 4043 * This callback may sleep. 4044 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being 4045 * unbound from vif. 4046 * This callback may sleep. 4047 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to 4048 * another, as specified in the list of 4049 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according 4050 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode. 4051 * This callback may sleep. 4052 * 4053 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the 4054 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel 4055 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses 4056 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is 4057 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being 4058 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed. 4059 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface. 4060 * 4061 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and 4062 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed. 4063 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and 4064 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames). 4065 * This callback may sleep. 4066 * 4067 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed. 4068 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces. 4069 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep. 4070 * 4071 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel. 4072 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this 4073 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be 4074 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call 4075 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get() 4076 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is 4077 * 1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been 4078 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish(). 4079 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called, 4080 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway. 4081 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4082 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA 4083 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing 4084 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch. 4085 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4086 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the 4087 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 4088 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4089 * when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the 4090 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 4091 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called 4092 * when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with 4093 * CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count. 4094 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all 4095 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A 4096 * channel context is bound before this is called. 4097 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again. 4098 * 4099 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the 4100 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0 4101 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide. 4102 * 4103 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration 4104 * and hardware limits. 4105 * 4106 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver 4107 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations 4108 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The 4109 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of 4110 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation. 4111 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can 4112 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use. 4113 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both 4114 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes. 4115 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or 4116 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets 4117 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue 4118 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch 4119 * response template is provided, together with the location of the 4120 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within 4121 * the function call. 4122 * 4123 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue. 4124 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a 4125 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues 4126 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action 4127 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet. 4128 * 4129 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one. 4130 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster. 4131 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf 4132 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters 4133 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config. 4134 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since 4135 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the 4136 * changed parameters. 4137 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in 4138 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of 4139 * this call. 4140 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call 4141 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with 4142 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal. 4143 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports 4144 * aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation 4145 * between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while 4146 * skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU. 4147 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available. 4148 * Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided. 4149 * 4150 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep) 4151 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep) 4152 * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep. 4153 * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer. 4154 * This callback may sleep. 4155 * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags 4156 * This callback may sleep. 4157 * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using 4158 * 4-address mode 4159 * @set_sar_specs: Update the SAR (TX power) settings. 4160 * @sta_set_decap_offload: Called to notify the driver when a station is allowed 4161 * to use rx decapsulation offload 4162 * @add_twt_setup: Update hw with TWT agreement parameters received from the peer. 4163 * This callback allows the hw to check if requested parameters 4164 * are supported and if there is enough room for a new agreement. 4165 * The hw is expected to set agreement result in the req_type field of 4166 * twt structure. 4167 * @twt_teardown_request: Update the hw with TWT teardown request received 4168 * from the peer. 4169 * @set_radar_background: Configure dedicated offchannel chain available for 4170 * radar/CAC detection on some hw. This chain can't be used to transmit 4171 * or receive frames and it is bounded to a running wdev. 4172 * Background radar/CAC detection allows to avoid the CAC downtime 4173 * switching to a different channel during CAC detection on the selected 4174 * radar channel. 4175 * The caller is expected to set chandef pointer to NULL in order to 4176 * disable background CAC/radar detection. 4177 * @net_fill_forward_path: Called from .ndo_fill_forward_path in order to 4178 * resolve a path for hardware flow offloading 4179 * @change_vif_links: Change the valid links on an interface, note that while 4180 * removing the old link information is still valid (link_conf pointer), 4181 * but may immediately disappear after the function returns. The old or 4182 * new links bitmaps may be 0 if going from/to a non-MLO situation. 4183 * The @old array contains pointers to the old bss_conf structures 4184 * that were already removed, in case they're needed. 4185 * This callback can sleep. 4186 * @change_sta_links: Change the valid links of a station, similar to 4187 * @change_vif_links. This callback can sleep. 4188 * Note that a sta can also be inserted or removed with valid links, 4189 * i.e. passed to @sta_add/@sta_state with sta->valid_links not zero. 4190 * In fact, cannot change from having valid_links and not having them. 4191 */ 4192 struct ieee80211_ops { 4193 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4194 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control, 4195 struct sk_buff *skb); 4196 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4197 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4198 #ifdef CONFIG_PM 4199 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan); 4200 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4201 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled); 4202 #endif 4203 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4204 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4205 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4206 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4207 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p); 4208 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4209 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4210 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed); 4211 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4212 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4213 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info, 4214 u64 changed); 4215 void (*vif_cfg_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4216 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4217 u64 changed); 4218 void (*link_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4219 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4220 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info, 4221 u64 changed); 4222 4223 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4224 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 4225 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4226 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 4227 4228 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4229 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list); 4230 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4231 unsigned int changed_flags, 4232 unsigned int *total_flags, 4233 u64 multicast); 4234 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4235 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4236 unsigned int filter_flags, 4237 unsigned int changed_flags); 4238 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4239 bool set); 4240 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd, 4241 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4242 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key); 4243 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4244 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4245 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf, 4246 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4247 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key); 4248 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4249 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4250 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data); 4251 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4252 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx); 4253 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4254 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req); 4255 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4256 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4257 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4258 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4259 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req, 4260 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies); 4261 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4262 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4263 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4264 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4265 const u8 *mac_addr); 4266 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4267 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4268 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4269 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats); 4270 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4271 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 4272 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 4273 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value); 4274 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value); 4275 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4276 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4277 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4278 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4279 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 4280 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4281 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4282 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4283 struct dentry *dir); 4284 void (*link_sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4285 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4286 struct ieee80211_link_sta *link_sta, 4287 struct dentry *dir); 4288 #endif 4289 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4290 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4291 int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4292 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4293 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4294 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4295 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4296 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state, 4297 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state); 4298 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4299 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4300 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4301 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4302 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4303 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4304 u32 changed); 4305 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4306 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4307 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4308 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4309 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4310 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4311 struct station_info *sinfo); 4312 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4313 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4314 unsigned int link_id, u16 ac, 4315 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params); 4316 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4317 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4318 u64 tsf); 4319 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4320 s64 offset); 4321 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4322 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4323 4324 /** 4325 * @ampdu_action: 4326 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action. 4327 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want 4328 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through 4329 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 4330 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver 4331 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size 4332 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the 4333 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be 4334 * possible with a buf_size of 8: 4335 * 4336 * - ``TX: 1.....7`` 4337 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1) 4338 * - ``TX: 8..1...`` 4339 * 4340 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the 4341 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be: 4342 * 4343 * - ``TX: 1 or`` 4344 * - ``TX: 18 or`` 4345 * - ``TX: 81`` 4346 * 4347 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again. 4348 * 4349 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return 4350 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START 4351 * if the session can start immediately. 4352 * 4353 * The callback can sleep. 4354 */ 4355 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4356 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4357 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params); 4358 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx, 4359 struct survey_info *survey); 4360 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4361 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class); 4362 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE 4363 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4364 void *data, int len); 4365 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb, 4366 struct netlink_callback *cb, 4367 void *data, int len); 4368 #endif 4369 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4370 u32 queues, bool drop); 4371 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4372 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4373 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4374 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant); 4375 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant); 4376 4377 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4378 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4379 struct ieee80211_channel *chan, 4380 int duration, 4381 enum ieee80211_roc_type type); 4382 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4383 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4384 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx); 4385 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4386 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max); 4387 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4388 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4389 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask); 4390 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4391 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4392 const struct ieee80211_event *event); 4393 4394 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4395 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4396 u16 tids, int num_frames, 4397 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 4398 bool more_data); 4399 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4400 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4401 u16 tids, int num_frames, 4402 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 4403 bool more_data); 4404 4405 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4406 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset); 4407 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4408 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4409 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data); 4410 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4411 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4412 u32 sset, u8 *data); 4413 4414 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4415 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4416 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info); 4417 void (*mgd_complete_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4418 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4419 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info); 4420 4421 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4422 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4423 4424 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4425 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4426 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4427 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4428 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4429 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx, 4430 u32 changed); 4431 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4432 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4433 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf, 4434 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4435 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4436 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4437 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf, 4438 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4439 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4440 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs, 4441 int n_vifs, 4442 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode); 4443 4444 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4445 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type); 4446 4447 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6) 4448 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4449 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4450 struct inet6_dev *idev); 4451 #endif 4452 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4453 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4454 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef); 4455 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4456 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4457 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4458 4459 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4460 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4461 void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4462 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4463 void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4464 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4465 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4466 4467 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4468 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4469 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4470 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4471 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4472 int *dbm); 4473 4474 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4475 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4476 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class, 4477 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 4478 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie); 4479 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4480 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4481 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4482 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4483 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4484 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params); 4485 4486 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4487 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 4488 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4489 4490 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4491 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4492 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf); 4493 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4494 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4495 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4496 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4497 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes); 4498 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4499 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4500 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func); 4501 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4502 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4503 u8 instance_id); 4504 bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4505 struct sk_buff *head, 4506 struct sk_buff *skb); 4507 int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4508 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4509 struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats); 4510 int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4511 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 4512 void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4513 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 4514 int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4515 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4516 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4517 struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf); 4518 int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4519 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4520 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids); 4521 void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4522 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4523 void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4524 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled); 4525 int (*set_sar_specs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4526 const struct cfg80211_sar_specs *sar); 4527 void (*sta_set_decap_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4528 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4529 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled); 4530 void (*add_twt_setup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4531 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4532 struct ieee80211_twt_setup *twt); 4533 void (*twt_teardown_request)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4534 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 flowid); 4535 int (*set_radar_background)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4536 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef); 4537 int (*net_fill_forward_path)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4538 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4539 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4540 struct net_device_path_ctx *ctx, 4541 struct net_device_path *path); 4542 int (*change_vif_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4543 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4544 u16 old_links, u16 new_links, 4545 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *old[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]); 4546 int (*change_sta_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4547 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4548 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4549 u16 old_links, u16 new_links); 4550 }; 4551 4552 /** 4553 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device 4554 * 4555 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 4556 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 4557 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 4558 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 4559 * @priv_data_len. 4560 * 4561 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 4562 * @ops: callbacks for this device 4563 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device. 4564 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d) 4565 * 4566 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 4567 */ 4568 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len, 4569 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops, 4570 const char *requested_name); 4571 4572 /** 4573 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device 4574 * 4575 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 4576 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 4577 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 4578 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 4579 * @priv_data_len. 4580 * 4581 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 4582 * @ops: callbacks for this device 4583 * 4584 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 4585 */ 4586 static inline 4587 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len, 4588 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops) 4589 { 4590 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL); 4591 } 4592 4593 /** 4594 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device 4595 * 4596 * You must call this function before any other functions in 4597 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you 4598 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information. 4599 * 4600 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw() 4601 * 4602 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise. 4603 */ 4604 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4605 4606 /** 4607 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description 4608 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec 4609 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds 4610 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period) 4611 */ 4612 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink { 4613 int throughput; 4614 int blink_time; 4615 }; 4616 4617 /** 4618 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags 4619 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio 4620 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working 4621 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one 4622 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP 4623 */ 4624 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags { 4625 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0), 4626 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1), 4627 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2), 4628 }; 4629 4630 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4631 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4632 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4633 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4634 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4635 const char * 4636 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4637 unsigned int flags, 4638 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 4639 unsigned int blink_table_len); 4640 #endif 4641 /** 4642 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED 4643 * 4644 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4645 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4646 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4647 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4648 * 4649 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4650 * 4651 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4652 */ 4653 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4654 { 4655 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4656 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw); 4657 #else 4658 return NULL; 4659 #endif 4660 } 4661 4662 /** 4663 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED 4664 * 4665 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4666 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4667 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4668 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4669 * 4670 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4671 * 4672 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4673 */ 4674 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4675 { 4676 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4677 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw); 4678 #else 4679 return NULL; 4680 #endif 4681 } 4682 4683 /** 4684 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED 4685 * 4686 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4687 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4688 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4689 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4690 * 4691 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4692 * 4693 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4694 */ 4695 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4696 { 4697 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4698 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw); 4699 #else 4700 return NULL; 4701 #endif 4702 } 4703 4704 /** 4705 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED 4706 * 4707 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4708 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4709 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4710 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4711 * 4712 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4713 * 4714 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4715 */ 4716 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4717 { 4718 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4719 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw); 4720 #else 4721 return NULL; 4722 #endif 4723 } 4724 4725 /** 4726 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger 4727 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for 4728 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags 4729 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput 4730 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table 4731 * 4732 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are 4733 * configured) or the name of the new trigger. 4734 * 4735 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw(). 4736 */ 4737 static inline const char * 4738 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags, 4739 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 4740 unsigned int blink_table_len) 4741 { 4742 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4743 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table, 4744 blink_table_len); 4745 #else 4746 return NULL; 4747 #endif 4748 } 4749 4750 /** 4751 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device 4752 * 4753 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources 4754 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem. 4755 * 4756 * @hw: the hardware to unregister 4757 */ 4758 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4759 4760 /** 4761 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor 4762 * 4763 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the 4764 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw() 4765 * before calling this function. 4766 * 4767 * @hw: the hardware to free 4768 */ 4769 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4770 4771 /** 4772 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely 4773 * 4774 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason 4775 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state 4776 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware 4777 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by 4778 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all 4779 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function. 4780 * 4781 * @hw: the hardware to restart 4782 */ 4783 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4784 4785 /** 4786 * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list 4787 * 4788 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 4789 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 4790 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 4791 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 4792 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 4793 * 4794 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4795 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 4796 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 4797 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4798 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4799 * 4800 * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock 4801 * 4802 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4803 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL 4804 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4805 * @list: the destination list 4806 */ 4807 void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4808 struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list); 4809 4810 /** 4811 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context 4812 * 4813 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 4814 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 4815 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 4816 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 4817 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 4818 * 4819 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4820 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 4821 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 4822 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4823 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4824 * 4825 * This function must be called with BHs disabled. 4826 * 4827 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4828 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL 4829 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4830 * @napi: the NAPI context 4831 */ 4832 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4833 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi); 4834 4835 /** 4836 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame 4837 * 4838 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 4839 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 4840 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 4841 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 4842 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 4843 * 4844 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 4845 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 4846 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 4847 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4848 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4849 * 4850 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni(). 4851 * 4852 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4853 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4854 */ 4855 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb) 4856 { 4857 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL); 4858 } 4859 4860 /** 4861 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame 4862 * 4863 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context 4864 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 4865 * 4866 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not 4867 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with 4868 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4869 * 4870 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4871 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4872 */ 4873 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 4874 4875 /** 4876 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context) 4877 * 4878 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context 4879 * (internally disables bottom halves). 4880 * 4881 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may 4882 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 4883 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 4884 * 4885 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 4886 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 4887 */ 4888 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4889 struct sk_buff *skb) 4890 { 4891 local_bh_disable(); 4892 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb); 4893 local_bh_enable(); 4894 } 4895 4896 /** 4897 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta 4898 * 4899 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS 4900 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station 4901 * entering/leaving PS mode. 4902 * 4903 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled. 4904 * 4905 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against 4906 * each other. 4907 * 4908 * @sta: currently connected sta 4909 * @start: start or stop PS 4910 * 4911 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set. 4912 */ 4913 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start); 4914 4915 /** 4916 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta 4917 * (in process context) 4918 * 4919 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context 4920 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still 4921 * applies. 4922 * 4923 * @sta: currently connected sta 4924 * @start: start or stop PS 4925 * 4926 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(). 4927 */ 4928 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4929 bool start) 4930 { 4931 int ret; 4932 4933 local_bh_disable(); 4934 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start); 4935 local_bh_enable(); 4936 4937 return ret; 4938 } 4939 4940 /** 4941 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received 4942 * @sta: currently connected station 4943 * 4944 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 4945 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a 4946 * connected station was received. 4947 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 4948 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must 4949 * be serialized. 4950 */ 4951 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4952 4953 /** 4954 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received 4955 * @sta: currently connected station 4956 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame 4957 * 4958 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 4959 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame 4960 * from a connected station was received. 4961 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 4962 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be 4963 * serialized. 4964 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown. 4965 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC 4966 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper 4967 * checks. 4968 */ 4969 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 4970 4971 /* 4972 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions. 4973 * This is enough for the radiotap header. 4974 */ 4975 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4) 4976 4977 /** 4978 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames 4979 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station 4980 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames 4981 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID 4982 * 4983 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing 4984 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need 4985 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit. 4986 * 4987 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are 4988 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data 4989 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim 4990 * call! Beware of the locking!) 4991 * 4992 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD) 4993 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are 4994 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes 4995 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data, 4996 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered 4997 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP). 4998 * 4999 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per 5000 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since 5001 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the 5002 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that 5003 * use this API. 5004 */ 5005 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5006 u8 tid, bool buffered); 5007 5008 /** 5009 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet 5010 * 5011 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support 5012 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent 5013 * rate selection table for the station entry. 5014 * 5015 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5016 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent. 5017 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted. 5018 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information 5019 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch 5020 */ 5021 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5022 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5023 struct sk_buff *skb, 5024 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest, 5025 int max_rates); 5026 5027 /** 5028 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station 5029 * 5030 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput 5031 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can 5032 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station 5033 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic 5034 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause 5035 * slow stations to starve). 5036 * 5037 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for. 5038 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps. 5039 */ 5040 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 5041 u32 thr); 5042 5043 /** 5044 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback 5045 * 5046 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta 5047 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision 5048 * in updating the tx rate in data path. 5049 * 5050 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5051 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for. 5052 * @info: tx status information 5053 */ 5054 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5055 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 5056 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info); 5057 5058 /** 5059 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback 5060 * 5061 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been 5062 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for 5063 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics. 5064 * 5065 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5066 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls 5067 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() 5068 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5069 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni(). 5070 * 5071 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5072 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5073 */ 5074 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5075 struct sk_buff *skb); 5076 5077 /** 5078 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback 5079 * 5080 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status 5081 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not 5082 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info. 5083 * 5084 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 5085 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 5086 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5087 * 5088 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5089 * @status: tx status information 5090 */ 5091 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5092 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status); 5093 5094 /** 5095 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb 5096 * 5097 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status 5098 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to 5099 * specific skbs. 5100 * 5101 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 5102 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 5103 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5104 * 5105 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5106 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent 5107 * (NULL for multicast packets) 5108 * @info: tx status information 5109 */ 5110 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5111 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5112 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 5113 { 5114 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = { 5115 .sta = sta, 5116 .info = info, 5117 }; 5118 5119 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status); 5120 } 5121 5122 /** 5123 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context) 5124 * 5125 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context. 5126 * 5127 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and 5128 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed 5129 * for a single hardware. 5130 * 5131 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5132 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5133 */ 5134 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5135 struct sk_buff *skb) 5136 { 5137 local_bh_disable(); 5138 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb); 5139 local_bh_enable(); 5140 } 5141 5142 /** 5143 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback 5144 * 5145 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context 5146 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 5147 * 5148 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and 5149 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5150 * 5151 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5152 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5153 */ 5154 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5155 struct sk_buff *skb); 5156 5157 /** 5158 * ieee80211_tx_status_8023 - transmit status callback for 802.3 frame format 5159 * 5160 * Call this function for all transmitted data frames after their transmit 5161 * completion. This callback should only be called for data frames which 5162 * are using driver's (or hardware's) offload capability of encap/decap 5163 * 802.11 frames. 5164 * 5165 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5166 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other and all 5167 * calls in the same tx status family. 5168 * 5169 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5170 * @vif: the interface for which the frame was transmitted 5171 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5172 */ 5173 void ieee80211_tx_status_8023(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5174 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5175 struct sk_buff *skb); 5176 5177 /** 5178 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station 5179 * 5180 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding 5181 * connected STA. 5182 * 5183 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta 5184 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response 5185 */ 5186 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets); 5187 5188 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2 5189 5190 /** 5191 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets 5192 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element 5193 * @tim_length: size of TIM element 5194 * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets 5195 * to countdown counters. This array can contain zero values which 5196 * should be ignored. 5197 * @mbssid_off: position of the multiple bssid element 5198 */ 5199 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets { 5200 u16 tim_offset; 5201 u16 tim_length; 5202 5203 u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM]; 5204 u16 mbssid_off; 5205 }; 5206 5207 /** 5208 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function 5209 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5210 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5211 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 5212 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 5213 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP) 5214 * 5215 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 5216 * obtain the beacon template. 5217 * 5218 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the 5219 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template 5220 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when 5221 * applicable, the CSA count. 5222 * 5223 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 5224 * 5225 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 5226 */ 5227 struct sk_buff * 5228 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5229 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5230 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs, 5231 unsigned int link_id); 5232 5233 /** 5234 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function 5235 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5236 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5237 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset. 5238 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 5239 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length, 5240 * (including the ID and length bytes!). 5241 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 5242 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP) 5243 * 5244 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 5245 * obtain the beacon frame. 5246 * 5247 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5248 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon 5249 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly 5250 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt). 5251 * 5252 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 5253 * 5254 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 5255 */ 5256 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5257 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5258 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length, 5259 unsigned int link_id); 5260 5261 /** 5262 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function 5263 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5264 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5265 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP) 5266 * 5267 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 5268 * 5269 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 5270 */ 5271 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5272 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5273 unsigned int link_id) 5274 { 5275 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL, link_id); 5276 } 5277 5278 /** 5279 * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown 5280 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5281 * 5282 * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission. 5283 * This function is called implicitly when 5284 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the 5285 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this 5286 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown. 5287 * 5288 * Return: new countdown value 5289 */ 5290 u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5291 5292 /** 5293 * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown 5294 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5295 * @counter: the new value for the counter 5296 * 5297 * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be 5298 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211. 5299 * 5300 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(), 5301 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value. 5302 */ 5303 void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter); 5304 5305 /** 5306 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch 5307 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5308 * 5309 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this 5310 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to 5311 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed. 5312 */ 5313 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5314 5315 /** 5316 * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1 5317 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5318 * 5319 * This function returns whether the countdown reached zero. 5320 */ 5321 bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5322 5323 /** 5324 * ieee80211_color_change_finish - notify mac80211 about color change 5325 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5326 * 5327 * After a color change announcement was scheduled and the counter in this 5328 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to 5329 * notify mac80211 that the color can be changed 5330 */ 5331 void ieee80211_color_change_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5332 5333 /** 5334 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template 5335 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5336 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5337 * 5338 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to 5339 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller. 5340 * 5341 * Can only be called in AP mode. 5342 * 5343 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error. 5344 */ 5345 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5346 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5347 5348 /** 5349 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template 5350 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5351 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5352 * 5353 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to 5354 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 5355 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used. 5356 * 5357 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 5358 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit. 5359 * 5360 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error. 5361 */ 5362 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5363 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5364 5365 /** 5366 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template 5367 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5368 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5369 * @link_id: If the vif is an MLD, get a frame with the link addresses 5370 * for the given link ID. For a link_id < 0 you get a frame with 5371 * MLD addresses, however useful that might be. 5372 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set 5373 * if at all possible 5374 * 5375 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to 5376 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 5377 * BSSID and address is used. 5378 * 5379 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the 5380 * returned packet will be QoS NDP. 5381 * 5382 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 5383 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields. 5384 * 5385 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error. 5386 */ 5387 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5388 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5389 int link_id, bool qos_ok); 5390 5391 /** 5392 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 5393 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5394 * @src_addr: source MAC address 5395 * @ssid: SSID buffer 5396 * @ssid_len: length of SSID 5397 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs 5398 * 5399 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 5400 * hardware. 5401 * 5402 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 5403 */ 5404 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5405 const u8 *src_addr, 5406 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len, 5407 size_t tailroom); 5408 5409 /** 5410 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function 5411 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5412 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5413 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 5414 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 5415 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5416 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame. 5417 * 5418 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5419 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5420 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 5421 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed. 5422 */ 5423 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5424 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 5425 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 5426 struct ieee80211_rts *rts); 5427 5428 /** 5429 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame 5430 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5431 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5432 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 5433 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5434 * 5435 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 5436 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5437 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 5438 * 5439 * Return: The duration. 5440 */ 5441 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5442 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len, 5443 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 5444 5445 /** 5446 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function 5447 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5448 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5449 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 5450 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 5451 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5452 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame. 5453 * 5454 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5455 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5456 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 5457 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed. 5458 */ 5459 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5460 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5461 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 5462 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 5463 struct ieee80211_cts *cts); 5464 5465 /** 5466 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame 5467 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5468 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5469 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 5470 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5471 * 5472 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 5473 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5474 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 5475 * 5476 * Return: The duration. 5477 */ 5478 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5479 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5480 size_t frame_len, 5481 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 5482 5483 /** 5484 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame 5485 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5486 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5487 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on 5488 * @frame_len: the length of the frame. 5489 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted. 5490 * 5491 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its 5492 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps). 5493 * 5494 * Return: The duration. 5495 */ 5496 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5497 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5498 enum nl80211_band band, 5499 size_t frame_len, 5500 struct ieee80211_rate *rate); 5501 5502 /** 5503 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames 5504 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5505 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5506 * 5507 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If 5508 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast 5509 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host 5510 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered 5511 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame. 5512 * 5513 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered 5514 * frames are available. 5515 * 5516 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was 5517 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus 5518 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns 5519 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver 5520 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to 5521 * use common code for all beacons. 5522 */ 5523 struct sk_buff * 5524 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5525 5526 /** 5527 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32 5528 * 5529 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32. 5530 * 5531 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5532 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 5533 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5534 */ 5535 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5536 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 5537 5538 /** 5539 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key 5540 * 5541 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken 5542 * from the given packet. 5543 * 5544 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5545 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted 5546 * with this P1K 5547 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5548 */ 5549 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5550 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k) 5551 { 5552 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data; 5553 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control); 5554 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]); 5555 5556 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k); 5557 } 5558 5559 /** 5560 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX 5561 * 5562 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32 5563 * and transmitter address. 5564 * 5565 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5566 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key 5567 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 5568 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5569 */ 5570 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5571 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 5572 5573 /** 5574 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key 5575 * 5576 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values 5577 * in the packet. 5578 * 5579 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5580 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be 5581 * encrypted with this key 5582 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes 5583 */ 5584 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5585 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k); 5586 5587 /** 5588 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos 5589 * 5590 * @pos: start of crypto header 5591 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5592 * @pn: PN to add 5593 * 5594 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of 5595 * the packet payload) 5596 * 5597 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should 5598 * point to the crypto header) 5599 */ 5600 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn); 5601 5602 /** 5603 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter 5604 * 5605 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5606 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 5607 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 5608 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 5609 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data 5610 * 5611 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs 5612 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done 5613 * by the device and not by mac80211. 5614 * 5615 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 5616 * can be done concurrently. 5617 */ 5618 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5619 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 5620 5621 /** 5622 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter 5623 * 5624 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5625 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 5626 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 5627 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 5628 * @seq: new sequence data 5629 * 5630 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the 5631 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK 5632 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called 5633 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211. 5634 * 5635 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 5636 * can be done concurrently. 5637 */ 5638 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5639 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 5640 5641 /** 5642 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key 5643 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5644 * 5645 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the 5646 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but 5647 * instead assumed to have been removed already. 5648 * 5649 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently) 5650 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().) 5651 */ 5652 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5653 5654 /** 5655 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN 5656 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on 5657 * @keyconf: new key data 5658 * 5659 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new 5660 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper 5661 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them. 5662 * 5663 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will 5664 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to 5665 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an 5666 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc. 5667 * 5668 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware 5669 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK 5670 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver 5671 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses 5672 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part 5673 * of the reconfiguration. 5674 * 5675 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq() 5676 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly. 5677 * 5678 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware, 5679 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases 5680 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for 5681 * the key that's being replaced. 5682 */ 5683 struct ieee80211_key_conf * 5684 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5685 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5686 5687 /** 5688 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying 5689 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on 5690 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association 5691 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying 5692 * @gfp: allocation flags 5693 */ 5694 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid, 5695 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp); 5696 5697 /** 5698 * ieee80211_key_mic_failure - increment MIC failure counter for the key 5699 * 5700 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called 5701 * at the same time. 5702 * 5703 * @keyconf: the key in question 5704 */ 5705 void ieee80211_key_mic_failure(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5706 5707 /** 5708 * ieee80211_key_replay - increment replay counter for the key 5709 * 5710 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called 5711 * at the same time. 5712 * 5713 * @keyconf: the key in question 5714 */ 5715 void ieee80211_key_replay(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 5716 5717 /** 5718 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue 5719 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5720 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5721 * 5722 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_wake_queue. 5723 */ 5724 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5725 5726 /** 5727 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue 5728 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5729 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5730 * 5731 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_stop_queue. 5732 */ 5733 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5734 5735 /** 5736 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue 5737 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5738 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 5739 * 5740 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_queue_stopped. 5741 * 5742 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise. 5743 */ 5744 5745 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 5746 5747 /** 5748 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues 5749 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5750 * 5751 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_tx_stop_all_queues. 5752 */ 5753 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5754 5755 /** 5756 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues 5757 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5758 * 5759 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_tx_wake_all_queues. 5760 */ 5761 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5762 5763 /** 5764 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan 5765 * 5766 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is 5767 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify 5768 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from 5769 * any context, including hardirq context. 5770 * 5771 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan 5772 * @info: information about the completed scan 5773 */ 5774 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5775 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info); 5776 5777 /** 5778 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan 5779 * 5780 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the 5781 * driver whenever there are new scan results available. 5782 * 5783 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 5784 */ 5785 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5786 5787 /** 5788 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped 5789 * 5790 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by 5791 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task. 5792 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan 5793 * while associating, for instance. 5794 * 5795 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 5796 */ 5797 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5798 5799 /** 5800 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags 5801 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have 5802 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware 5803 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new 5804 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they 5805 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 5806 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all 5807 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 5808 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up). 5809 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER: Skip any interfaces where SDATA 5810 * is not in the driver. This may fix crashes during firmware recovery 5811 * for instance. 5812 */ 5813 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags { 5814 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0, 5815 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0), 5816 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1), 5817 IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER = BIT(2), 5818 }; 5819 5820 /** 5821 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces 5822 * 5823 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5824 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as 5825 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep. 5826 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 5827 * 5828 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5829 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5830 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 5831 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5832 */ 5833 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 5834 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 5835 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5836 void *data); 5837 5838 /** 5839 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces 5840 * 5841 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5842 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 5843 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator 5844 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can 5845 * be used. 5846 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 5847 * 5848 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5849 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5850 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 5851 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5852 */ 5853 static inline void 5854 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 5855 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 5856 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5857 void *data) 5858 { 5859 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw, 5860 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE, 5861 iterator, data); 5862 } 5863 5864 /** 5865 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces 5866 * 5867 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5868 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 5869 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 5870 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead. 5871 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 5872 * 5873 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5874 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5875 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 5876 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5877 */ 5878 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5879 u32 iter_flags, 5880 void (*iterator)(void *data, 5881 u8 *mac, 5882 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5883 void *data); 5884 5885 /** 5886 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx - iterate active interfaces 5887 * 5888 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 5889 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 5890 * This version can only be used while holding the wiphy mutex. 5891 * The driver must not call this with a lock held that it can also take in 5892 * response to callbacks from mac80211, and it must not call this within 5893 * callbacks made by mac80211 - both would result in deadlocks. 5894 * 5895 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5896 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 5897 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 5898 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5899 */ 5900 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5901 u32 iter_flags, 5902 void (*iterator)(void *data, 5903 u8 *mac, 5904 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 5905 void *data); 5906 5907 /** 5908 * ieee80211_iterate_stations - iterate stations 5909 * 5910 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given 5911 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback 5912 * function for them. 5913 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator 5914 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic can be used. 5915 * 5916 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5917 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 5918 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5919 */ 5920 void ieee80211_iterate_stations(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5921 void (*iterator)(void *data, 5922 struct ieee80211_sta *sta), 5923 void *data); 5924 5925 /** 5926 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations 5927 * 5928 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given 5929 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback 5930 * function for them. 5931 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 5932 * 5933 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 5934 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 5935 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 5936 */ 5937 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5938 void (*iterator)(void *data, 5939 struct ieee80211_sta *sta), 5940 void *data); 5941 /** 5942 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 5943 * 5944 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue. 5945 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be. 5946 * 5947 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 5948 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue 5949 */ 5950 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work); 5951 5952 /** 5953 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 5954 * 5955 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211 5956 * workqueue. 5957 * 5958 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 5959 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue 5960 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing 5961 */ 5962 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5963 struct delayed_work *dwork, 5964 unsigned long delay); 5965 5966 /** 5967 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session. 5968 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session 5969 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 5970 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs) 5971 * 5972 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise 5973 * 5974 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 5975 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 5976 * will be managed by the mac80211. 5977 */ 5978 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, 5979 u16 timeout); 5980 5981 /** 5982 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate. 5983 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 5984 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 5985 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 5986 * 5987 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 5988 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called 5989 * from any context. 5990 */ 5991 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 5992 u16 tid); 5993 5994 /** 5995 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session. 5996 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop 5997 * @tid: the TID to stop BA. 5998 * 5999 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active 6000 * 6001 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 6002 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 6003 * will be managed by the mac80211. 6004 */ 6005 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid); 6006 6007 /** 6008 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate. 6009 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6010 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 6011 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on. 6012 * 6013 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 6014 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It 6015 * can be called from any context. 6016 */ 6017 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 6018 u16 tid); 6019 6020 /** 6021 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station 6022 * 6023 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on 6024 * @addr: station's address 6025 * 6026 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 6027 * 6028 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 6029 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 6030 */ 6031 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6032 const u8 *addr); 6033 6034 /** 6035 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware 6036 * 6037 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6038 * @addr: remote station's address 6039 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'. 6040 * 6041 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 6042 * 6043 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 6044 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 6045 * 6046 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get 6047 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'. 6048 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple 6049 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another 6050 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first). 6051 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL 6052 * is not reliable. 6053 * 6054 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible. 6055 */ 6056 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6057 const u8 *addr, 6058 const u8 *localaddr); 6059 6060 /** 6061 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs - find STA by link addresses 6062 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6063 * @addr: remote station's link address 6064 * @localaddr: local link address, use %NULL for any (but avoid that) 6065 * @link_id: pointer to obtain the link ID if the STA is found, 6066 * may be %NULL if the link ID is not needed 6067 * 6068 * Obtain the STA by link address, must use RCU protection. 6069 */ 6070 struct ieee80211_sta * 6071 ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6072 const u8 *addr, 6073 const u8 *localaddr, 6074 unsigned int *link_id); 6075 6076 /** 6077 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up 6078 * @hw: the hardware 6079 * @pubsta: the station 6080 * @block: whether to block or unblock 6081 * 6082 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues 6083 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before 6084 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be 6085 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected 6086 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag. 6087 * 6088 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free 6089 * manner. 6090 * 6091 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames 6092 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not 6093 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call 6094 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to 6095 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the 6096 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must 6097 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will 6098 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if 6099 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also 6100 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver 6101 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after 6102 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually 6103 * woke up while blocked or not. 6104 */ 6105 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6106 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block); 6107 6108 /** 6109 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP 6110 * @pubsta: the station 6111 * 6112 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell 6113 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the 6114 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead. 6115 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD. 6116 * 6117 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must 6118 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function 6119 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or 6120 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix! 6121 * 6122 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no 6123 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if 6124 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history 6125 * and restore the _irqsafe version! 6126 */ 6127 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 6128 6129 /** 6130 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP 6131 * @pubsta: the station 6132 * @tid: the tid of the NDP 6133 * 6134 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close 6135 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when 6136 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window. 6137 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a 6138 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the 6139 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to 6140 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any 6141 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong. 6142 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame 6143 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save. 6144 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames(). 6145 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver 6146 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call 6147 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent. 6148 */ 6149 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid); 6150 6151 /** 6152 * ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates - recalculate aggregate data after a change 6153 * @pubsta: the station 6154 * 6155 * Call this function after changing a per-link aggregate data as referenced in 6156 * &struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates by accessing the agg field of 6157 * &struct ieee80211_link_sta. 6158 * 6159 * With non MLO the data in deflink will be referenced directly. In that case 6160 * there is no need to call this function. 6161 */ 6162 void ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 6163 6164 /** 6165 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid 6166 * 6167 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call 6168 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of 6169 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule 6170 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness. 6171 * 6172 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent 6173 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not 6174 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the 6175 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame 6176 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission 6177 * attempts. 6178 * 6179 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or 6180 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available. 6181 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of 6182 * them to 0. 6183 * 6184 * @pubsta: the station 6185 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for 6186 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec) 6187 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec) 6188 */ 6189 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 6190 u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime); 6191 6192 /** 6193 * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device 6194 * 6195 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6196 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6197 * 6198 * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can 6199 * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false. 6200 */ 6201 bool 6202 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 6203 6204 /** 6205 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device 6206 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6207 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 6208 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 6209 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 6210 * 6211 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 6212 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 6213 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device 6214 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due 6215 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few 6216 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep. 6217 * 6218 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order 6219 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the 6220 * set_key callback. 6221 */ 6222 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6223 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6224 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6225 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6226 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6227 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 6228 void *data), 6229 void *iter_data); 6230 6231 /** 6232 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device 6233 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6234 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 6235 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 6236 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 6237 * 6238 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 6239 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 6240 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station 6241 * in removal process will be skipped. 6242 * 6243 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section, 6244 * and thus iter must be atomic. 6245 */ 6246 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6247 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6248 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6249 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6250 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6251 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 6252 void *data), 6253 void *iter_data); 6254 6255 /** 6256 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts 6257 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6258 * @iter: iterator function 6259 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function 6260 * 6261 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and 6262 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other 6263 * places while calling into the driver. 6264 * 6265 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during 6266 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being 6267 * removed. 6268 * 6269 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed 6270 * before the restart are considered already present so will be 6271 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already 6272 * or not. 6273 */ 6274 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic( 6275 struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6276 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6277 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf, 6278 void *data), 6279 void *iter_data); 6280 6281 /** 6282 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 6283 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6284 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6285 * 6286 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 6287 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate 6288 * information. This function must only be called from within the 6289 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function 6290 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return 6291 * %NULL. 6292 * 6293 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 6294 */ 6295 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6296 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6297 6298 /** 6299 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons 6300 * 6301 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6302 * 6303 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and 6304 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the 6305 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function. 6306 */ 6307 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6308 6309 /** 6310 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP 6311 * 6312 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6313 * 6314 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and 6315 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver 6316 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost. 6317 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated 6318 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set. 6319 * 6320 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state, 6321 * without connection recovery attempts. 6322 */ 6323 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6324 6325 /** 6326 * ieee80211_disconnect - request disconnection 6327 * 6328 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6329 * @reconnect: immediate reconnect is desired 6330 * 6331 * Request disconnection from the current network and, if enabled, send a 6332 * hint to the higher layers that immediate reconnect is desired. 6333 */ 6334 void ieee80211_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool reconnect); 6335 6336 /** 6337 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume 6338 * 6339 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6340 * 6341 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume. 6342 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the 6343 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were 6344 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or 6345 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume. 6346 * 6347 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses 6348 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface 6349 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then 6350 * disconnect normally later. 6351 * 6352 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and 6353 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it 6354 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the 6355 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto). 6356 */ 6357 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6358 6359 /** 6360 * ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect - disconnect from AP after 6361 * hardware restart 6362 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6363 * 6364 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after 6365 * hardware restart. 6366 */ 6367 void ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6368 6369 /** 6370 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring 6371 * rssi threshold triggered 6372 * 6373 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6374 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type 6375 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available 6376 * @gfp: context flags 6377 * 6378 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality 6379 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform 6380 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold. 6381 */ 6382 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6383 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event, 6384 s32 rssi_level, 6385 gfp_t gfp); 6386 6387 /** 6388 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss 6389 * 6390 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6391 * @gfp: context flags 6392 */ 6393 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp); 6394 6395 /** 6396 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected 6397 * 6398 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6399 */ 6400 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6401 6402 /** 6403 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process 6404 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6405 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not 6406 * 6407 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel 6408 * and wake up the suspended queues. 6409 */ 6410 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success); 6411 6412 /** 6413 * ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect - disconnect due to channel switch error 6414 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6415 * @block_tx: if %true, do not send deauth frame. 6416 * 6417 * Instruct mac80211 to disconnect due to a channel switch error. The channel 6418 * switch can request to block the tx and so, we need to make sure we do not send 6419 * a deauth frame in this case. 6420 */ 6421 void ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6422 bool block_tx); 6423 6424 /** 6425 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition 6426 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6427 * @link_id: link ID for MLO, or 0 6428 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode 6429 * 6430 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed 6431 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than 6432 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth. 6433 */ 6434 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id, 6435 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode); 6436 6437 /** 6438 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start 6439 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6440 */ 6441 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6442 6443 /** 6444 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired 6445 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6446 */ 6447 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6448 6449 /** 6450 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions 6451 * 6452 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device 6453 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba 6454 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs 6455 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)." 6456 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and 6457 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation. 6458 * 6459 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6460 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid 6461 * @addr: & to bssid mac address 6462 */ 6463 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap, 6464 const u8 *addr); 6465 6466 /** 6467 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered 6468 * @pubsta: station struct 6469 * @tid: the session's TID 6470 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are 6471 * assumed to be out of the window after the call 6472 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc. 6473 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware 6474 * 6475 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and 6476 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it 6477 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released 6478 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.) 6479 */ 6480 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 6481 u16 ssn, u64 filtered, 6482 u16 received_mpdus); 6483 6484 /** 6485 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame 6486 * 6487 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder 6488 * buffer. 6489 * 6490 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6491 * @ra: the peer's destination address 6492 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session 6493 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver 6494 */ 6495 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn); 6496 6497 /** 6498 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work 6499 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6500 * @addr: station mac address 6501 * @tid: the rx tid 6502 */ 6503 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr, 6504 unsigned int tid); 6505 6506 /** 6507 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session 6508 * 6509 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 6510 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 6511 * reordering. 6512 * 6513 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 6514 * when they complete AddBa negotiation. 6515 * 6516 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6517 * @addr: station mac address 6518 * @tid: the rx tid 6519 */ 6520 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6521 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 6522 { 6523 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 6524 return; 6525 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid); 6526 } 6527 6528 /** 6529 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session 6530 * 6531 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 6532 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 6533 * reordering. 6534 * 6535 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 6536 * when they complete DelBa negotiation. 6537 * 6538 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6539 * @addr: station mac address 6540 * @tid: the rx tid 6541 */ 6542 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6543 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 6544 { 6545 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 6546 return; 6547 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS); 6548 } 6549 6550 /** 6551 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout 6552 * 6553 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx 6554 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer. 6555 * 6556 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa. 6557 * 6558 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6559 * @addr: station mac address 6560 * @tid: the rx tid 6561 */ 6562 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6563 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid); 6564 6565 /* Rate control API */ 6566 6567 /** 6568 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo 6569 * 6570 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for. 6571 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on. 6572 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration 6573 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs 6574 * to be filled in 6575 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate 6576 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and 6577 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network. 6578 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the 6579 * RTS threshold 6580 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission 6581 * if the selected rate supports it 6582 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask 6583 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use) 6584 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode 6585 */ 6586 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control { 6587 struct ieee80211_hw *hw; 6588 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband; 6589 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf; 6590 struct sk_buff *skb; 6591 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate; 6592 bool rts, short_preamble; 6593 u32 rate_idx_mask; 6594 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask; 6595 bool bss; 6596 }; 6597 6598 /** 6599 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities 6600 */ 6601 enum rate_control_capabilities { 6602 /** 6603 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: 6604 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable) 6605 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains 6606 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has, 6607 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us. 6608 */ 6609 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0), 6610 /** 6611 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER: 6612 * mac80211 should start A-MPDU sessions on tx 6613 */ 6614 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER = BIT(1), 6615 }; 6616 6617 struct rate_control_ops { 6618 unsigned long capa; 6619 const char *name; 6620 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6621 void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv, 6622 struct dentry *debugfsdir); 6623 void (*free)(void *priv); 6624 6625 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp); 6626 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6627 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 6628 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta); 6629 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6630 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 6631 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6632 u32 changed); 6633 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6634 void *priv_sta); 6635 6636 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv, 6637 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6638 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st); 6639 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6640 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6641 struct sk_buff *skb); 6642 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 6643 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc); 6644 6645 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta, 6646 struct dentry *dir); 6647 6648 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta); 6649 }; 6650 6651 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6652 enum nl80211_band band, 6653 int index) 6654 { 6655 return (sta == NULL || sta->deflink.supp_rates[band] & BIT(index)); 6656 } 6657 6658 static inline s8 6659 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6660 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 6661 { 6662 int i; 6663 6664 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 6665 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 6666 return i; 6667 6668 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */ 6669 WARN_ON_ONCE(1); 6670 6671 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */ 6672 return 0; 6673 } 6674 6675 static inline 6676 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 6677 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 6678 { 6679 unsigned int i; 6680 6681 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 6682 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 6683 return true; 6684 return false; 6685 } 6686 6687 /** 6688 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver 6689 * 6690 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass 6691 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station 6692 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on 6693 * the most recent rate control module decision. 6694 * 6695 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6696 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. 6697 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station. 6698 */ 6699 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6700 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 6701 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates); 6702 6703 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 6704 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 6705 6706 static inline bool 6707 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6708 { 6709 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20; 6710 } 6711 6712 static inline bool 6713 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6714 { 6715 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 6716 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 6717 } 6718 6719 static inline bool 6720 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6721 { 6722 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 6723 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 6724 } 6725 6726 static inline bool 6727 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6728 { 6729 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40; 6730 } 6731 6732 static inline bool 6733 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 6734 { 6735 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) && 6736 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) && 6737 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT); 6738 } 6739 6740 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 6741 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p) 6742 { 6743 if (p2p) { 6744 switch (type) { 6745 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION: 6746 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT; 6747 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP: 6748 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO; 6749 default: 6750 break; 6751 } 6752 } 6753 return type; 6754 } 6755 6756 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 6757 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 6758 { 6759 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p); 6760 } 6761 6762 /** 6763 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data 6764 * 6765 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 6766 * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, otherwise 0 6767 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 6768 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 6769 * 6770 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and 6771 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the 6772 * matching GroupId management frame. 6773 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path. 6774 */ 6775 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id, 6776 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position); 6777 6778 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6779 int rssi_min_thold, 6780 int rssi_max_thold); 6781 6782 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6783 6784 /** 6785 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface 6786 * 6787 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 6788 * 6789 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid. 6790 * 6791 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not 6792 * applicable. 6793 */ 6794 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6795 6796 /** 6797 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup 6798 * @vif: virtual interface 6799 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s) 6800 * @gfp: allocation flags 6801 * 6802 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(). 6803 */ 6804 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6805 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup, 6806 gfp_t gfp); 6807 6808 /** 6809 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission 6810 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6811 * @vif: virtual interface 6812 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver 6813 * @band: the band to transmit on 6814 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to 6815 * 6816 * Note: must be called under RCU lock 6817 */ 6818 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6819 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb, 6820 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta); 6821 6822 /** 6823 * ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap - Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header 6824 * of injected frames. 6825 * 6826 * To accurately parse and take into account rate and retransmission fields, 6827 * you must initialize the chandef field in the ieee80211_tx_info structure 6828 * of the skb before calling this function. 6829 * 6830 * @skb: packet injected by userspace 6831 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 6832 */ 6833 bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb, 6834 struct net_device *dev); 6835 6836 /** 6837 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state 6838 * 6839 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change 6840 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending 6841 * 6842 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent 6843 * 6844 * private: 6845 * 6846 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors 6847 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA 6848 */ 6849 struct ieee80211_noa_data { 6850 u32 next_tsf; 6851 bool has_next_tsf; 6852 6853 u8 absent; 6854 6855 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 6856 struct { 6857 u32 start; 6858 u32 duration; 6859 u32 interval; 6860 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 6861 }; 6862 6863 /** 6864 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE 6865 * 6866 * @attr: P2P NoA IE 6867 * @data: NoA tracking data 6868 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 6869 * 6870 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors 6871 */ 6872 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr, 6873 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 6874 6875 /** 6876 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change 6877 * 6878 * @data: NoA tracking data 6879 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 6880 */ 6881 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 6882 6883 /** 6884 * ieee80211_tdls_oper_request - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation 6885 * @vif: virtual interface 6886 * @peer: the peer's destination address 6887 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation 6888 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown 6889 * @gfp: allocation flags 6890 * 6891 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request(). 6892 */ 6893 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer, 6894 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper, 6895 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp); 6896 6897 /** 6898 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID 6899 * 6900 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from 6901 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such 6902 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID, 6903 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks 6904 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be 6905 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC. 6906 * 6907 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it 6908 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should 6909 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback. 6910 * 6911 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for 6912 * @tid: the TID to reserve 6913 * 6914 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure 6915 */ 6916 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 6917 6918 /** 6919 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID 6920 * 6921 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function 6922 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for 6923 * preventing use of this TID in the driver. 6924 * 6925 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called 6926 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called 6927 * from the driver's @sta_state callback. 6928 * 6929 * @sta: the station 6930 * @tid: the TID to unreserve 6931 */ 6932 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 6933 6934 /** 6935 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 6936 * 6937 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6938 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 6939 * ieee80211_next_txq() 6940 * 6941 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available. 6942 * 6943 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section, 6944 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in 6945 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the 6946 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call 6947 * but for the duration of the frame handling. 6948 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method, 6949 * rcu_read_lock() is already held. 6950 * 6951 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called. 6952 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead. 6953 */ 6954 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6955 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 6956 6957 /** 6958 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 6959 * (in process context) 6960 * 6961 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context 6962 * (internally disables bottom halves). 6963 * 6964 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6965 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 6966 * ieee80211_next_txq() 6967 */ 6968 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6969 struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 6970 { 6971 struct sk_buff *skb; 6972 6973 local_bh_disable(); 6974 skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq); 6975 local_bh_enable(); 6976 6977 return skb; 6978 } 6979 6980 /** 6981 * ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue - mac80211 handler for wake_tx_queue callback 6982 * 6983 * @hw: pointer as obtained from wake_tx_queue() callback(). 6984 * @txq: pointer as obtained from wake_tx_queue() callback(). 6985 * 6986 * Drivers can use this function for the mandatory mac80211 wake_tx_queue 6987 * callback in struct ieee80211_ops. They should not call this function. 6988 */ 6989 void ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6990 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 6991 6992 /** 6993 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from 6994 * 6995 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6996 * @ac: AC number to return packets from. 6997 * 6998 * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq 6999 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the 7000 * driver has finished scheduling it. 7001 */ 7002 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 7003 7004 /** 7005 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs 7006 * 7007 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7008 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for 7009 * 7010 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq(). 7011 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently. 7012 */ 7013 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 7014 7015 /* (deprecated) */ 7016 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac) 7017 { 7018 } 7019 7020 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7021 struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force); 7022 7023 /** 7024 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission 7025 * 7026 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7027 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7028 * 7029 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled, 7030 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered. 7031 * 7032 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for 7033 * this TXQ internally. 7034 */ 7035 static inline void 7036 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 7037 { 7038 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true); 7039 } 7040 7041 /** 7042 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq() 7043 * 7044 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7045 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7046 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets. 7047 * 7048 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ 7049 * internally. 7050 */ 7051 static inline void 7052 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 7053 bool force) 7054 { 7055 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force); 7056 } 7057 7058 /** 7059 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit 7060 * 7061 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by 7062 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime 7063 * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by 7064 * next_txq(). 7065 * 7066 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to 7067 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have 7068 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will 7069 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit 7070 * again. 7071 * 7072 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be 7073 * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates 7074 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry 7075 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this 7076 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets 7077 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq(). 7078 * 7079 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7080 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7081 */ 7082 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7083 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 7084 7085 /** 7086 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq 7087 * 7088 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e. 7089 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up 7090 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa. 7091 * 7092 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7093 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count 7094 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count 7095 */ 7096 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 7097 unsigned long *frame_cnt, 7098 unsigned long *byte_cnt); 7099 7100 /** 7101 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination. 7102 * 7103 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination. 7104 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 7105 * 7106 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7107 * @inst_id: the local instance id 7108 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*) 7109 * @gfp: allocation flags 7110 */ 7111 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7112 u8 inst_id, 7113 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason, 7114 gfp_t gfp); 7115 7116 /** 7117 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event. 7118 * 7119 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The 7120 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211. 7121 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 7122 * 7123 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7124 * @match: match event information 7125 * @gfp: allocation flags 7126 */ 7127 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7128 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match, 7129 gfp_t gfp); 7130 7131 /** 7132 * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX. 7133 * 7134 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 7135 * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length. 7136 * 7137 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7138 * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate 7139 * information. 7140 * @len: frame length in bytes 7141 */ 7142 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7143 struct ieee80211_rx_status *status, 7144 int len); 7145 7146 /** 7147 * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX. 7148 * 7149 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 7150 * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length. 7151 * 7152 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7153 * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 7154 * @len: frame length in bytes 7155 */ 7156 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7157 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, 7158 int len); 7159 /** 7160 * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading. 7161 * 7162 * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3 7163 * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the 7164 * hardware or firmware. 7165 * 7166 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7167 * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off 7168 */ 7169 bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable); 7170 7171 /** 7172 * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template. 7173 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 7174 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7175 * 7176 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 7177 * 7178 * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error. 7179 */ 7180 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7181 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7182 7183 /** 7184 * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast 7185 * probe response template. 7186 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 7187 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7188 * 7189 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 7190 * 7191 * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error. 7192 */ 7193 struct sk_buff * 7194 ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7195 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7196 7197 /** 7198 * ieeee80211_obss_color_collision_notify - notify userland about a BSS color 7199 * collision. 7200 * 7201 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7202 * @color_bitmap: a 64 bit bitmap representing the colors that the local BSS is 7203 * aware of. 7204 * @gfp: allocation flags 7205 */ 7206 void 7207 ieeee80211_obss_color_collision_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7208 u64 color_bitmap, gfp_t gfp); 7209 7210 /** 7211 * ieee80211_is_tx_data - check if frame is a data frame 7212 * 7213 * The function is used to check if a frame is a data frame. Frames with 7214 * hardware encapsulation enabled are data frames. 7215 * 7216 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted. 7217 */ 7218 static inline bool ieee80211_is_tx_data(struct sk_buff *skb) 7219 { 7220 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info = IEEE80211_SKB_CB(skb); 7221 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (void *) skb->data; 7222 7223 return info->flags & IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP || 7224 ieee80211_is_data(hdr->frame_control); 7225 } 7226 7227 /** 7228 * ieee80211_set_active_links - set active links in client mode 7229 * @vif: interface to set active links on 7230 * @active_links: the new active links bitmap 7231 * 7232 * This changes the active links on an interface. The interface 7233 * must be in client mode (in AP mode, all links are always active), 7234 * and @active_links must be a subset of the vif's valid_links. 7235 * 7236 * If a link is switched off and another is switched on at the same 7237 * time (e.g. active_links going from 0x1 to 0x10) then you will get 7238 * a sequence of calls like 7239 * - change_vif_links(0x11) 7240 * - unassign_vif_chanctx(link_id=0) 7241 * - change_sta_links(0x11) for each affected STA (the AP) 7242 * (TDLS connections on now inactive links should be torn down) 7243 * - remove group keys on the old link (link_id 0) 7244 * - add new group keys (GTK/IGTK/BIGTK) on the new link (link_id 4) 7245 * - change_sta_links(0x10) for each affected STA (the AP) 7246 * - assign_vif_chanctx(link_id=4) 7247 * - change_vif_links(0x10) 7248 * 7249 * Note: This function acquires some mac80211 locks and must not 7250 * be called with any driver locks held that could cause a 7251 * lock dependency inversion. Best call it without locks. 7252 */ 7253 int ieee80211_set_active_links(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 active_links); 7254 7255 /** 7256 * ieee80211_set_active_links_async - asynchronously set active links 7257 * @vif: interface to set active links on 7258 * @active_links: the new active links bitmap 7259 * 7260 * See ieee80211_set_active_links() for more information, the only 7261 * difference here is that the link change is triggered async and 7262 * can be called in any context, but the link switch will only be 7263 * completed after it returns. 7264 */ 7265 void ieee80211_set_active_links_async(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7266 u16 active_links); 7267 7268 #endif /* MAC80211_H */ 7269